JP2018126463A - Reel type game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a new game machine capable of further enhancing fun of a game.SOLUTION: A reel type game machine is configured such that a game progress situation can be grasped easily by shifting control processing relating to an AT state to a main control board side for controlling game progress, a new lottery method not found in a conventional lottery method is utilized, or information output at a sub-board side for controlling performance display is made diverse.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a spinning machine.

  In a spinning machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after inserting a predetermined number of game medals, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As a result of the rotation of the plurality of rows of reels (reel), the reels are stopped using the rotary stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotation, and the predetermined pattern on the effective line When a combination of (for example, a winning combination such as “777”) is lined up, a special gaming state in which a profit state is higher for the player than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small role or the like is higher than in a normal state) ) Is a common type. Here, in a spinning-reel type gaming machine, when an image for production to enhance the fun of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotating and stopping operations of the reel There is a structure to predict and enjoy the outcome of the game while comparing the design displayed on the spinning cylinder with the effect image displayed on the display. There are many things.

  In addition, in a recent spinning-type game machine, it is configured such that the presence / absence of a winning combination and the type of winning combination change depending on the operation mode (operation order and operation timing) of the spinning stop device, so that the player Many devices (so-called AT machines) that assist by issuing an operation instruction (navigation) to win an advantageous winning combination have also appeared. This AT machine has a state in which an operation instruction is issued (AT state) and a state in which an operation instruction is not issued (non-AT state). The longer the AT state, the more advantageous to the player. It has a great playability.

JP 2014-161344 A

  Further improvements are desired to further enhance the fun of the game.

The spinning machine according to this aspect is
Multiple reels,
An effect display section that can display multiple stop switches and effects,
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to display, on the effect display unit, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means. Configured,
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the first special combination with the same winning probability is configured to stop and be displayed, so that the first special gaming state is entered.
When the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities may be different is configured to stop and display to shift to the second special gaming state. ,
The notification expectation suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting the expectation level that the notification state after the special game state ends, is configured to be executable,
As an effect mode of the notification expectation level suggestion effect, a first effect mode and a second effect mode with a relatively high expectation level to be in the notification state after the end of the special gaming state than the first effect mode, At least,
Executed based on the notification expectation suggestion effect executed based on the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the first special combination and the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the second special combination. In the above-mentioned notification expectation suggestion effect, the spinning machine is configured such that the probability that the second effect mode is executed is different.

  According to the rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a state in which the door of the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the swivel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 shows a list 3 of symbol combinations in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus appearance rate in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-recoverable error processing on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (second sheet) on the main control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the power-off process on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a push order display image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the sub-side program start process on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a sub-side power-off process on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of one command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the effect determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of battle effect execution feasibility determination processing on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the effect determination process during AT on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the resurrection / prohibition effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of processing during AT at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the special indication process at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the specialization process when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the swivel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the inside BB advantageous process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the rotating game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a process at the time of first cylinder stop acceptance on the sub-control board side in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the process at the time of accepting the second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torsional gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the third related rotation stop effect related determination process on the sub-control board side in the rotary game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the third time cylinder stop acceptance process on the sub-control board side in the turn type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a revival effect image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 54 is a BB start effect image diagram in the rotary type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 55 is a symbol combination list 4 in the rotating type gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a list of condition devices in the rotating type gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a list of a small combination, a re-playing combination, and a bonus appearance rate in the spinning type gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 60 is an RT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of one-command processing in the rotating game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the start lever operation-related effect-related determination process in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of an AT determination during AT operation at the time of lever operation in the rotary gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the fall suggestion display process at the time of the first torso stop in the spinning cylinder game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the second suggestion of falling suggestion display processing in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the third-cylinder stop AT preparation effect determination process in the rotary-type gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 68 is a BB winning effect image diagram with a setting difference in the rotating type gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the third related-related effect determination process at the time of stopping the torso in the rotating game machine according to the modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of freeze lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the rotating type gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the present embodiment. FIG. 73 is an AT state transition diagram in the rotating game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a game section transition control process on the main control board side in the spinning-reel game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a continuous effect execution image diagram on the main control board side in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a spinning-type game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, as a random number) Is a hard random number, a built-in random number generated by a main control chip including a CPU, or a soft random number as a pseudo-random number). For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of the game, specifically, a “winning random number” related to a special role or a winning combination (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, etc. Can be mentioned. “CPU” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) used, processing performance, or the like. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a certain level regardless of whether the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated or not. This also includes shutting down the power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power outages. “ROM” is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and physically retains information (for example, “1” for a device configuration that conducts when a current for reading data is applied, It will be “0” if the device configuration is not.) RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the art, and electrically holds information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, “1” is stored if it is stored, and it is not stored. It is generally “0.” In general, backup power is supplied to some or all of the data stored in the RAM when the power is interrupted). The “game state” is, for example, a special game state in which a game medal can be easily acquired and advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, such as a bonus game, a type 1 BB, a type 2 BB, or the like) ), The re-game probability variation game state (RT state) in which the re-game player win rate is higher (or lower) than the normal game state in which the re-game player win rate is a predetermined value, and the winning role Order of the reels for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined, and the like. Also in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of transition to the RT state, AT state, ART state is different, high probability normal gaming state, low probability normal gaming state, etc. (in this example, referred to as lottery state) ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined {in addition, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, etc.) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side}. In this example, the state related to the AT and the RT state are individually described. The RT state is referred to as “RT1” and the state related to the AT is referred to as “normal game state”. As a state relating to ART, the state relating to ART may be referred to as “normal gaming state” or the like. “Winning combination” is the type of condition device (or condition device number) won by internal lottery. The “notification state” is a state related to an AT capable of executing push order navigation described later, and even if a game is won by a condition device that does not execute push order navigation because the winning combination is not different depending on the reel stop order. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be performed, the “notification state” is set. The “counter value” is also referred to as “notification game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when “the number of notification games that can be executed” is 1 or more (the game that has become “0” may be included), the push order navigation described later can be executed. In addition, as the “notification game executable number”, the number of game media obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) (the number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number) The number of wins for the order bell may be adopted. In addition, the “special notification state” is a state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and is referred to as “addition special state” in this example. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. For example, the specific condition is that, for example, one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, push order bell combination) is won. “Type 1 special character” is a character that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winnings per prescribed number or increases the probability that the conditional device related to winnings per prescribed number will operate. The operation can be continued until a game result is obtained that does not exceed 12 times, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). "Type 1 special combination continuous operation device" is a device that can operate the first type special combination continuously, and is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed. The operation is terminated and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. “Type 2 special combination” is a combination that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the combination lottery. The combination is activated when a predetermined game result is obtained. In such a case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (challenge bonus). "Type 2 special feature continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate type 2 special features, and is activated when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. The operation ends and is sometimes referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The “ordinary accessory” is an accessory that increases the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number will operate. It operates when a combination is displayed and ends when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” is a configuration in which, when the first type BB combination wins, it is regarded as having been JACIN and is always in the RB during the execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-RB and RB during execution of the first type BB. In addition, the “non-control reel” is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after performing the stop operation is not executed, and is stopped at the nearest reel position where the stop operation can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is accepted. It is a reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration that is always in the CB when the second type BB is executed. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration that repeatedly executes non-CB and CB during execution of the second type BB.

  This embodiment is only an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the feature (outline) of the spinning-rotor type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1 (FIG. 2 for a part of the configuration), a basic structure on the front side of the rotary type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. The rotating type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base body), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, a main control. A substrate M (a substrate on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub control substrate S (a substrate on which the sub control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted) are configured. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for enabling visual recognition of a gaming state, a mechanism for enabling input of game media, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, and other mechanisms. Specifically, the reel window D160, the insertion number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the credit number display apparatus D200, and the payout number display apparatus are provided as mechanisms for making the gaming state visible. A (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section indicator YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling payout of the inserted game media are settled. Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. In addition, the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment protrudes to the player side to which the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the medal slot D170, the bet button D220, the settlement button D60, the sub input button SB and the like are attached. It has a shape console. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism to make game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the gaming state visible is described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured such that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be seen through the reel window D160. In addition, the insertion number indicator lamp D210 is constituted by an LED, and is configured so that the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (to insert a game medal necessary for starting one game) are lit. Has been. Further, the operation state indicator lamp D180 is configured by an LED and is configured to be turned on / off according to the current operation state (medal acceptance / non-acceptance state, re-game stop state, game start wait state, etc.). The special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. The special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of payouts in the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) to be described later. By displaying so that the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained. The credit amount display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit number) stored in the gaming machine as medals held by the player. The payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured by a 7-segment display, and the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) The condition device (the so-called push order (sometimes referred to as a role with a push order), which may differ depending on the winning combination depending on the stop order of D43). Is a reel that is most advantageous to the player in a game in which a profit rate (the number of payouts, the subsequent RT state, etc., which can be different) is generally established. The stop order can be notified (the notification may be referred to as push order navigation). Thus, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently being paid out and the reel stop order that provides the highest profit to the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays games according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state relating to AT that is advantageous for the player to be guaranteed when progressing (in this example, it is also referred to as a push order navigation state or a notification game and will be described in detail later). It is configured as follows. Note that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a configuration, the player can be configured to display the number of games that can stay in the AT state on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games in which the state related to the advantageous AT is guaranteed and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (push order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices: a payout number display device and a push order display device.

  Further, the advantageous section indicator YH is constituted by an LED, and is configured to turn on when it is an “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section” (for lighting and extinguishing timings). Will be described later). Here, in the case of the spinning type gaming machine according to the present example, a special gaming state (so-called big hit game, which is a bonus game, in which a game medal can be easily obtained and which is advantageous to the player, like the conventional spinning type gaming machine. Or the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), and the winning rate of the re-gamer is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state where the winning rate of the re-gamer is a predetermined value. The re-play probability variation game state (RT state), the reel stop order for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state in which the stop position can be notified, the RT state and the AT state Combined ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these “gaming state”, one of three “game sections” of “normal section”, “standby section” and “advantage section” Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and “advantage section” is set. Among these, the “advantageous section” is positioned as being relatively advantageous to the player over the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. “Advantageous section” is associated. That is, when the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. Similarly, since it is performed on the main control board side that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous for the player by the lighting / extinction status of the advantageous section indicator YH, It can be communicated to players without lies. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set. Since the state related to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the AT state is cleared and initialized), the change of the set “game section” also affects the transition of the “game state” As a result, it is possible to automatically suppress a significant increase in gambling due to a “game state” such as an AT state or an ART state with a relatively high degree of design freedom. It is. As described above, when the “advantageous section” continues until the predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is reached, the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the termination condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The end condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-reel game machine according to this example is “the push that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts among the small combinations that make up the push combination (the combination with push order)” One execution of sequential navigation (for example, when there are seven, three, and one small combination as the small combination constituting the push forward combination, the push navigation in which the largest number of payouts can be acquired is seven. If there is a push order that can be acquired 7 or 1 by the push order, and a push order that can be obtained 3 by the push order, the push order navigation that can be obtained by 3 is referred to here. Does not apply to push order navigation) or “Wins any of BB, RB, MB” and satisfies “arbitrary end condition (40G1 set loop lottery not selected (AT), fixed 32G Elapsed (gaseous signs, etc.)) or “Advantageous zone 1500G” is the end condition To have. In the case of a specification in which there is no push order bell combination (eg, a specification in which there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but there is no small combination in which the number of payouts varies depending on the push order) The condition for ending the advantageous section of “one push order navigation that can acquire the small combination with the largest number of payouts” is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination constituting the push combination is composed of the small combination corresponding to the 11-sheet combination and the small combination corresponding to the 1-sheet combination, “the number of payouts is the largest. The “execution of one push order navigation capable of acquiring a small combination” refers to notifying the push order in which eleven medals can be acquired (11 winning combinations can be won).

<Mechanism to enable input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for game medals, and the game medal inserted into the slot is guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a situation where medals can be received. Also, an insertion acceptance sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided in the gaming machine as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been inserted normally, the inserted medal can be detected as a bet. The bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to bet a stored medal (credit medal) by the operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and the stored medal (credit medal) and / or bet medal can be paid back to the player by the operation. Yes. Note that the game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the reel operation by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player. The operation of the reels can be stopped sequentially by operating the respective stop buttons. Has been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, the main part of the other mechanism provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the rotating game machine P by opening the front door DU of FIG. The front door DU has an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as a notice effect and a background effect as a mechanism for enhancing the fun of the game, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Middle panel (medium decorative panel) which is a member formed by a signal relay door substrate D, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a synthetic resin, and the like. An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like are provided. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit that displays the effect or the like can be visually recognized through a perspective region formed on the upper panel. In addition, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have a light emission source that emits light according to the progress of the game of the rotating game machine P. A unit D150 is provided, and LED lamp units S10 are provided on each of the right side and the left side across the upper panel D130. In addition, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU. Input signals from the stop button D40, the start lever D50, the checkout button D60, etc. described above are attached to the door substrate D. Is input, and has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. Further, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided in the vicinity of the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 is detected and simplified. It has a function of performing authenticity, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the reel window described above. Further, the sub input button SB attached to the console D190 described above is a member used for button striking effects and the like, and a mini game (for example, “AT state”) by the player's operation of the sub input button SB. It is a member configured to be able to execute progress such as the success or failure of rushing into. The front door DU of the swivel type gaming machine P can detect the open / close state of the medal tray D230 and the front door DU that receive a game medal (or may be simply referred to as a medal) discharged from the discharge port D240. A door switch D80 is provided. Further, the front door DU is provided with a key hole D260, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the key hole D260 is inserted into the key hole D260 {in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)} The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the door key is inserted into the keyhole D260 {and in addition, twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}, so that an error state (door opening error or the like) can be canceled. Yes.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part of the back box can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor or the like) for the reel M50. The reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band). And based on operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, it is comprised so that rotation operation and stop operation | movement of each reel part are enabled. Although not shown, an LED (hereinafter also referred to as a reel backlight) is provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and when the LED is lit, the outer periphery of the reel portion is provided. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel portion is lit by the light transmitted through. In addition, above the reel M50, a winding substrate K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) is stored.

  Further, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game is stored above the reel M50, and on the left side of the reel M50 is an effect display device S40, an LED lamp unit S10, and a speaker S20 shown in FIG. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, that controls various effects performed using the above-described information is stored. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of executing a setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but they may be provided at appropriate positions on the main control board M (that is, the front door DU is opened). Otherwise, it may be in a location where it is difficult to access artificially).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire revolving game machine P E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the discharge port D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the rotating game machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning cylinder type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion acceptance sensor D10s serving as a passage for game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 in the vicinity of the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal is discharged to the discharge opening D240. For example, a coin shooter D90 is provided. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions, and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions. The selected medal (or other foreign matter) is returned to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If the player inserts a game medal before operating the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion acceptance sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standard are selected. A medal that does not satisfy the standard and is inserted into the hopper H40 is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when a game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is satisfied, the inserted game medal Is returned to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90. In addition, a sensor for medal insertion, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion acceptance sensor D10s (the back of the flow path), and when a game medal that has been received satisfying the dimensional standard passes, the first insertion sensor D20s. The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and the signal is supplied to the main control board M to be described later.

  Next, a sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. A game medal inserted into the medal slot D170 first passes through the slot acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, it turns on when the two protruding mechanisms are pressed, and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Also, with this configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not. Such medals cannot be maintained in the standing state, and thus cannot pass through the passage (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the discharge port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that there is an error even when the on-time continues for a predetermined time or longer (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off). .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. The throwing sensors (first throwing sensor D20s and second throwing sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (adjacently arranged at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off-state (the order of transition of the on / off combination of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s, etc.) and the on / off time. It is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H is operated with the checkout button in the state where credits (game medals stored electronically inside the gaming machine) or bets (medals inserted to start the game) exist. It is activated when a game medal is paid out by winning or winning. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. Due to the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H are displaced from the game medal outlet H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the ON / OFF status of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). It is configured to detect various errors by monitoring the order of transition of the combination of off, etc.) and the time of on / off. More specifically, for example, when the game medal outlet H60 normally passes, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off due to the displacement of the discharge biasing means H70. 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout Sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off, so that when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected It is possible to exemplify the configuration of an error.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-reel type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) of 3, and the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames. The effective line for which a winning determination is made is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle M52, lower right M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (correspondence between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the order of priority winning (in order of drawing-in priority) is “re-playing role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, when the re-playing role and bonus are established at the same time The symbol combination which becomes the re-game player is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, when the bell and watermelon are established, if a stop button is pressed at a position where both can be retracted (positions within 4 frames to the winning stop position), priority is given to a small part with a large number of payouts. It is configured to retract. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames of each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of the effective line is changed (for example, 5 lines of 3 horizontal lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem even if it is changed to a line and changed to one line of the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53). In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small role that gives different profits to the player depending on the push order is won, a small role with a large number of payouts is operated when operated in a predetermined correct push order. Is given priority (number priority control), and can be displayed in a stop position (within 4 frames from the stop operation) when operated in an incorrect answer push order different from the correct answer push order. Among the symbols arranged), control (number priority control) is performed to increase the possibility of winning (the number of winning combinations among the plurality of winning symbol combinations is the highest).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements of the swivel type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 are all 20 frames (0 to 19), and the symbols are “Black Seven”, “White Seven”, “ There are 10 types: “Sheep”, “Blank”, “Bell”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Watermelon A”, “Watermelon B”, and “Cherry”. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination including “blank” As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of design is increased / decreased / changed.

  Next, FIGS. 7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each condition device. As will be described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, This one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (one line described above). In addition, even if the same type of symbols is not available on the active line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on the lines other than the active line when viewed from the player. It is configured so that three watermelon symbols are aligned on one line on the reel, such as aligned on a horizontal line). Further, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols that will be a first type BB combination (a so-called first type special combination, which is hereinafter referred to simply as a BB combination), 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and finished with payout exceeding 264 sheets) and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets) “Black Seven / Black Seven / Black Seven” and “Type 7 BB-C (continuous operation of RB-B, finished with more than 132 payouts)” It has three symbol combinations with “White Seven”. In the present embodiment, when the first type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the combination is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. Refers to the lottery table, and is configured to draw a winning combination (small role, replaying combination) other than the winning combination (a method that does not switch the table referred to in the case of lottery during one BB execution) Hereinafter, it may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during the execution of one BB. Further, when the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 14 to No. 16 corresponding to the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state) Will be described later). Note that “RT0” is more disadvantageous to the player than “RT1”, and thus transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 17 which is replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “Black Seven” can be stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding replay 05 is stopped and displayed, “white seven” can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the push order bell, which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6”, which will be described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the order of pushing most advantageous to the player, and the 21st to 27th When the combination of symbols “Wind 01” to “Win 03” corresponding to is stopped and 11 game medals are paid out, the reels are stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order most advantageous to the player. Symbol combinations corresponding to “No. 08” to “No. 11” corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, “-” indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, “bell-bell” corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the conditional device number is referred to as a winning number, and the conditional device number may also be referred to as a winning number thereafter. In this embodiment, the re-playing role is provided from re-playing-A to re-playing-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and in the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Correspondingly, the replaying combination to be stopped and displayed can be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in the item of “conditional device” which is the rightmost column, there are a plurality of numbers according to the stop order and stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. The condition devices of the type can be stopped and displayed, and among the plurality of types of condition devices, the condition devices having the same winning number are gathered, and “condition device (name)” is the third column from the right. It is shown in the item of. Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” that is the condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, “re-game” is selected according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. Three kinds of condition devices “01”, “replay 02”, and “replay 03” can be stopped and displayed. The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device relating to replay such as “replay 01” may be referred to as a re-playing role, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a prize such as “winning 01” may be referred to as a small role. A conditional device that starts a BB when it is stopped and displayed such as “1 type BB-A” may be referred to as a BB role. In addition, when winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role will be won, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the selected small role will stop. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not displayed without stopping, and the symbol corresponding to the small role is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, middle stop button D42 and right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol does not stop display (cannot be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small role does not stop and is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case where “1 type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21 is won, the cherry that is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and “1 type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) symbol numbers 0 to 4 on the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop (FIG. 6). When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the reel is positioned), the symbol number 4 corresponding to “winning 12” stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52 Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, “winning 12” is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “winning 13” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to is stopped, and “winning 13” is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop positions of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, “1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the seed BB-B stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the species BB-B is stopped, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located in the lower stage of the right reel M53 in the third stop. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” is stopped at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is placed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the “type BB-B” cannot be stopped, and neither of the condition devices is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the item “role” shows what role the “condition device (name)” is, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 indicates the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless of the replaying role in which the re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, the “reverse pressed white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is the RT button regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. This is a condition device related to replay in which a re-game player whose state does not change is stopped and displayed. However, the reverse reel (the reel is stopped in the order of right reel M53 → middle reel M52 → left reel M51) and the right reel M53 is stopped. Stops at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower stage of each reel. Operate the button And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that was won by Re-Game-B and won the AT extra lottery, the player was won the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim at “White Seven” by pressing it in reverse. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player. “Forward-pressed black 7-match replay” corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to a replay in which a re-gamer whose RT state does not shift is stopped regardless of the press order of the stop button. The reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is positioned at the lower stage of each reel, “Black Seven” is displayed at the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, the black sevens appear to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that won the Re-Game-C and won the AT extra lottery, the player won the AT extra lottery by performing an effect (details will be described later) instructing to aim for “Black Seven” by pushing forward. It is comprised so that it can alert | report to a player.

  In addition, “RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 4 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). )), The re-game player whose stop display is different may be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the re-game 01, the re-game 02 or the re-game 03 in which the RT state does not shift. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 is one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 as the first stop reel (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed. In addition, “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 determines which of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 the first stop reel (operates which stop button is operated). If the first reel is the right reel M53, the replay 01 or the replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from “RT1” to “RT0” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, “push order bell 123” to “push order bell 321” corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected may be different. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3”, and in the case of “123”, “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53” is stopped in the pressing order. For example, in the case of “winning A-1” (winning number 7), “123” = “Left → Middle → Right” is stopped in order (correct answer in the push order), which is the maximum number obtained. The symbol combination of “winning 01” from which eleven game medals can be acquired is stopped and displayed. Note that “123” in the “push order bell 123” indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of sheets obtained for the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in the pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum number of acquired sheets can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be made in the pressing order, one sheet is paid out. Then, in the state related to AT such as “AT in progress state”, the push order of the re-game player and the push order of the bell are navigated (the push order that gives the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), It is possible to create a plurality of gaming states with different profit margins of the player not navigating the pushing order to the states relating to AT. The state related to AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winnings, even if any of winning prizes 04 to 07 stops, that is, the maximum profit is obtained regardless of the pushing order. It is a condition device that can be acquired, and is sometimes called a push order unquestioned bell. In addition, “Watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily aligned on the parallel line. For example, the 60th prize in FIG. No. 14 has three watermelons A in the middle of each reel. In addition, “Watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in an oblique line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In the case of No. 16, three watermelons are aligned obliquely downward, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, “BB medium and weak rare role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device that can align three bells on the active line, which will be described later, but won during BB. This is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed. Also, “BB medium-rare small role (V-shaped bells)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device that can stop and display the bell on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which an AT addition lottery is executed by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, a numerical value from 0 to 3 is assigned to each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning number that does not include the bonus (BB role) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and the winning number that includes 1 type BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB role) (19) Bonus winning information of 1, winning type number (20-23) including 1 type BB-B is 2, winning winning information of winning number (24-27) including type 1, BB-C is 3 It is said. By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information regarding which BB is established and which BB combination is won. Details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “winning / replay winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 18 are assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, winning numbers that do not include re-playing roles and small roles (winning numbers 0 corresponding to loses and winning numbers 19, 20, 24 corresponding to bonuses) are set to 0 for winning / replaying winning information. The 1-18 winning / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device for the winning numbers including the replaying role or the small role. By storing the winning / replay winning information by the main control board M, it is possible to store information related to which replaying combination or small combination has been won. Details of the winning / replay winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item “production group number”, numerical values from 0 to 11 are assigned for each winning number. By transmitting the production group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the production executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the production group number will be described later.

  Next, a numerical value from 0 to 13 is assigned to each winning number in the item “departure group number”. The main control board M stores the outgoing ball group number, and the stored outgoing ball group number is used when executing a lottery related to the AT (for example, AT lottery, AT additional lottery), and the lottery processing related to the AT is executed. Program and data capacity can be reduced. Note that even if a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and AT extra lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout group number is not 0 is won, AT lottery or AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the outgoing ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a condition device with a payout group number of 0 is won, an AT lottery or AT lottery may be executed. In such a case, the payout group number is It is preferable that the lottery result is always lost (non-winning) when the condition device that becomes 0 is won and the AT lottery or the AT lottery is executed.

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning combination) and bonus (also referred to as a winning combination BB) and a bonus (respectively referred to as a winning combination) are determined by the winning lottery means in the present embodiment. It is a list which shows (it is also called a win rate). In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probability in “RT0”, “RT1”, and “RT2” when the BB is not operated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (especially the replaying combination) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying combination” (the total appearance of all replaying combinations) In the case of “RT1”, the rate of occurrence is higher than the other RT states. In addition, “re-game 04” (a so-called falling re-game player, “RT1” and a bonus corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where a bonus is not won can be displayed with winning numbers 4-6. When the combination is displayed in a stopped state, “RT0” will be elected mainly at “RT1” and hardly appear at “RT0”. In “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed in the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but the RT state does not shift even if “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. If “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, the fall effect (eg, the effect display device S40) that informs that the RT state has fallen. If “replay 04” is stopped and displayed at “RT0”, the fall effect may not be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that BB has been won because the fall effect has not been executed even though “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Can increase the sex. In such a configuration, the sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed, and a re-game player other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game” in which the RT state does not shift) 01 ”) may be configured to differ from the sound effect that is output due to the stop display, and by doing so, the player recognizes that“ re-game 04 ”is stopped and displayed. It can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, “normal gaming state”, sometimes referred to as non-AT gaming state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, “ “RT1” may be stayed in both cases of “AT state” and sometimes referred to as AT gaming state). At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in a non-AT gaming state is generated. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. Thereby, in the non-AT gaming state, it is possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0”. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-game player who does not fall the RT state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to notify the forward navigation). Thus, the player can take care that the RT state does not fall, and can operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified. In addition, “RT1” is mainly used for “RE GAME 05” that can be stopped and displayed with the winning number 2 or 3 (RE GAME who can be notified that the lottery has been won by adding the AT when stopped in the AT state). It appears at almost no other RT state. In addition, the transition of the state regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-gamer will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute push order navigation that notifies the player of the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player. . It should be noted that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small role, and overlaps with a part of watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which bonuses and small roles overlap.

  Also, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning a BB combination, which may be referred to as a single BB combination or a single BB), a new winning combination for the BB combination is invalid and only a small combination is effective. Specifically, for example, in the case of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), if winning 1 type BB-C is won The one-type BB-C related to the winning number 24 becomes invalid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 0 “losing” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. Further, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the winning combination of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are If the overlapping condition device is won, the new winning combination of BB is invalid and only winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in the situation of “RT2” and winning 1 type BB-A (carrying over), winning number 21 “1 type BB-B + winning-C” was won. In this case, Type 1 BB-B related to the winning number 21 is invalid, and only the winning-C is valid. That is, the situation is the same as in the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. Note that the one-type BB-A that has been carried over will continue to be in the winning state. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the re-playing combination. For example, a part of the re-game combination with the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. As described above, the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replaying player who can transition to the RT state). There is a possibility, and even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In such a configuration, control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even when the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to a RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability has not become low (frequently replayed), etc. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the fun related to the game, such that the possibility of winning the bonus is high.

  Next, the lottery probability in “1 type BB-A, B, C” at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the “common bell” with the winning number 13, the “BB medium weak rare combination (diagonal bell alignment)” with the winning number 17 and the “BB medium strong rare small combination with the winning number 18”. (V-shaped bell alignment) "is configured to be elected, and during operation of the BB elected in the" AT state "," BB medium-rare rare role (diagonal bell alignment) " Or, when “BB medium strong rare small role (V-shaped bell set)” is won, AT is added and lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  In the upper part of the figure, the small role appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the number in the setting 1 is 3204, the number in the setting 2 is 3404, the number in the setting 3 is 3604, the number in the setting 4 is 3904, the number in the setting 5 is 4204, and the number in the setting 6 is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player progresses a game while measuring the number of appearances (winning number) of the common bell, it is related to the gaming machine that is being played by frequently winning the common bell. The game can proceed while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Further, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. Although the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, the AT lottery, the AT extra lottery, and the high probability state transition lottery described later are not executed depending on the winning of the common bell. It is configured so as not to affect the state transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

  The middle part of the figure shows a list of expected values when there is a push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by the winning small role, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game) and the expected increase or decrease in medals per game ( The ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals when a game is played with 3 bets. If it is greater than 1, the expected value will be positive and the number of medals will increase. The value will be negative and medals will decrease). In addition, the average number of payouts per game is “total number of re-games (total of numbers for winning numbers 1 to 6) × number of pay-outs in re-games (3) + small role (11” Sum of the number of positions (small part appearance rate) (total number of places for winning numbers 7 to 16) × the number of payouts (11 sheets) for the small part (11 sheets) / sum of all the numbers (65536) ) ". Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average number of payouts per game / number of medals inserted per game (3)”. The number of medals inserted per game (the number of inserted game media when playing one game) is 3, and when the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, expected to increase or decrease medals per game The value is configured to be larger than 1. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, “RT1” has the largest medal increase / decrease expectation value per game. The numbers in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. In other words, when the game progresses in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (when operated in the optimum operation mode, also referred to as the advantageous operation mode), medals increase in “RT1”. Although “RT0” and “RT2” are not shown, the expected increase / decrease value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation occurs. Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is push order navigation even in “RT0” or “RT2”, but the present invention is not limited to this. ”Or“ RT2 ”may be configured so that the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is push order navigation is smaller than 1. Note that when the combination of symbols to be replayed is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected increase or decrease in medals in this embodiment, The calculation is based on the assumption that three sheets are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  In each RT state, the average number of payouts per game is 3.511129504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is “RT2”, it is 3.671337146. Further, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305013 when the RT state is “RT1”. When “RT2” is “1.22790487”, when there is push order navigation, the RT state “RT1” is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities relating to the above small role and re-playing role are merely examples. For example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” where BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation) The expected medal increase / decrease value) may be less than 1. With such a configuration, when a push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is currently established), when a bonus can not be aligned in a game where the bonus can be aligned However, if the number of held medals gradually decreases and push navigation is generated and “RT2” (when BB is currently established), it is intentional in a game in which bonuses can be aligned. By not arranging the bonuses, it is possible to prevent a strategy of increasing the number of medals. Specifically, it is preferable to design such that the probability of losing in “RT2” is higher than the winning probabilities of all small roles (winning-A1 to winning-I) winning in “RT2”. It is preferable that the winning probability of the re-gamer is determined so that the winning probability of the re-gamer will be low. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in “RT2” in this example, the winning probability of adding all the small roles is 18784/65536, the winning probability of adding all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of being lost is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and it is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the winning probability of adding all the small roles.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of one type BB-A is assigned 40, which is the same number for all of settings 1 to 6. The appearance rate of 1 type BB-C is assigned 160 which is the same number for all of setting 1 to setting 6. On the other hand, with respect to the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-B is different in the assigned number depending on the set value. In this way, type 1 BB-A and type 1 BB-C have no setting difference (type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-C may be referred to as no setting difference BB, or no setting difference bonus). The type 1 BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a setting difference BB or a setting difference bonus). In addition, the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state (for both “RT0” and “RT1”), regardless of the type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-B, and type 1 BB-C. Note that the appearance rates of the type 1 BB-A and the type 1 BB-C (summation) are the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-B (summation) differs depending on the set value. The appearance rate added up as the appearance rate of 1 type BB-B is the same even if the setting value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be different depending on the setting value. Even when configured, the type 1 BB-B may be referred to as a BB with a setting difference.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the rotating type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, in the spinning-type game machine according to the present embodiment, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure shows the movement related to the exchange of data, and the broken line portion in the figure shows the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this, and for example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN and the door board D without going through the main control board.

  The main control board (may be referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, and main game unit) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the revolving game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and a CPU C 100, a built-in ROM C 110, a built-in RAM C 120, and the like are mounted on the main control chip C so as to be able to exchange data with each other via a bus. The main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the rotating board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or control signal) toward K etc. {For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information toward the sub-control board S) The sub-control board S can execute the push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

  Also, the sub control chip SC is mounted on the sub control board (sometimes referred to as sub control means, sub board, sub control means, sub board, sub game unit) S, as with the above-described main control board M. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPU SC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to be exchanged with each other via a bus. The sub-control board S is connected with various LED lamps S10, a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a rotating backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Here, the spinning backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, the speaker S20, the effect display device S40, the rotary backlight S30, etc. The production of.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described insertion acceptance sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, start for starting the rotation of the reel M50. The lever D50, the stored game medals (credits) and the inserted game medals are paid out, the settlement button D60 for ending the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying the state of the game (not shown but described above) The inserted number display lamp D210, the operation state display lamp D180, the special game state display apparatus D250, the payout number display apparatus (push order display apparatus) D270, the credit number display apparatus D200, the advantageous section display apparatus YH, etc. , A door switch D80 for opening / closing judgment of front door, cancellation of error and change of set value, are turned on Game medals is determined to be incompatible (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and is connected after. The door substrate D is connected to the main control substrate M described above so as to exchange data. For this reason, when a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a settlement button D60, etc. provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal related to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal that the insertion acceptance sensor D10s detects the passage of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating substrate K. The spinning board K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning sensor K20. Yes. Moreover, in the spinning cylinder type gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (stepping motor) is used as the spinning cylinder motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps that the reel M50 makes one rotation. Each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) has a predetermined number of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) having a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is set. 24 steps (= 480/20) are set. There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the action The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not a medal has been paid out normally and measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board for controlling the presence or absence of power supply by the power switch E10). In FIG. 12, a state in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is represented by a dashed arrow. As shown in the figure, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (door board D, rotor board K, relay board IN) Electric power is supplied via the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and this electric power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage and then supplied to each control board and board.

  In addition, the main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used for executing a setting change device control process (to change settings), which will be described later, and a setting / reset that can execute setting value change, error cancellation, and the like. Button M30 is connected. In addition, the main control board M has a reel control means for controlling the rotation and stop of the reel M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to AT that is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing AT transition lottery for shifting to AT, and AT extra lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the “AT state” And AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 33 are flowcharts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). ing. Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-reel game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, after turning on the power of the revolving game machine P in step 1000, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of timer interrupt in step 1002 (here, timer interrupt is started). Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to processing at the time of timer interrupt described later is executed periodically). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery) To check whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is correctly held) and generate power-off recovery data. Next, in step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  In the case of Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (in step 1006). Whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal is determined. In the case of Yes in Step 1016, in Step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer stored in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether or not the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off process completion flag and returns to the process at the time of power-off according to the returned stack pointer.

  If NO in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If NO in step 1014, in step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing flag in the RAM (turned on in step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step The check result at 1006) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. In the case of Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the RAM initialization range to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM ( For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1034. The range not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). As a result of calculating the number of games, the number of games, the staying rate of the “advantageous section”, and the like are also not included in the RAM initialization range. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “favorable section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). The advantageous section ratio calculation process is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous character ratio per 6000 games → characteristic ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous character ratio → cumulative character ratio”. Is displayed. The continuous character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB is in operation / the total number of payouts”. The character ratio is “the number of payouts when the RB, CB, or SB is in operation”. / Total number of payouts ”. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1028, in step 1032 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM as a specific range including a storage area for storing setting values (setting value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area), and go to Step 1034. Next, in step 1034, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in step 1030 or step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not a value at which a special game is executed. (In order to prevent a special game from being erroneously executed when a process for determining whether or not to execute a special game is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the program processing is started). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the byte storing information related to the random number is stored in the byte. It is preferable to configure to store only the information related to the random number (not to store other information such as various timer values) (when operating other data stored in the same 1 byte, due to noise etc. (To prevent the information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting value (setting value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). When the set value (set value data) is managed from 1 to 6, initialization of the RAM is executed, and when the set value becomes “0”, it is necessary to return to “1”. Therefore, in this example, the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) is managed as 0 to 5, thereby correcting the setting value (setting value data) after executing the initialization of the RAM (step 1106 and The processing in step 1108) can be eliminated, and the processing time can be shortened and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = a value that is most disadvantageous for the player) in the setting value (setting value data), and in step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payout display device D270) that the setting change device is operating (for example, “88” for lighting all the segments). Then, a setting value is displayed on a setting display LED (not shown) (the display relating to the setting value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (setting value data) held in the RAM), and Step 1112 Migrate to As described above, the number-of-payout display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Since it is configured in this way, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of a 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be lit), an incorrect information can be notified when the push order is notified. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, it is possible to confirm whether or not 7 segments have failed by causing the payout number display device D270 to turn on all the “7” segments during operation of the setting change device. Providing profits can be prevented. Further, as a configuration relating to the display of the set value (set value data), a RAM for setting value display that stores data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value is stored. It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode is changed to the setting change mode is executed to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting / reset button M30 is switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current setting value (setting value data) (when the added setting value (setting value data) exceeds 5) In this case, the set value (set value data) is 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. Note that if the result of Step 1112 is No, the process proceeds to Step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing in steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. In the case of Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process in step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has been completed, and the setting display LED (not shown) The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of non-recoverable error processing relating to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interruption (hereinafter, a flowchart relating to timer interruption processing described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (in this example, 0 to 6, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays a set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and the process Is repeated, and the reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since an infinite loop is entered, any operation that prompts a return is not accepted). In the case of No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. The processing from step 1306 to step 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, information about the error, game progress status at the time of the error, etc. are displayed on the hall computer side. It is possible to output to

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initialized with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the upper limit of bets, the effective line for winning, etc.). In step 1203, data for clearing the data used in the previous game {eg, condition device number (winning number), production group number, instruction information} (“0” for clearing the RAM address). (Data) is also included in the RAM. In addition, you may make it comprise so that the number selected when the next game was performed may be overwritten, without clearing a condition apparatus number, production group number, instruction information, etc. Next, in step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the RT state set in step 1204 (command to the sub side). The process for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. In step 1704, a command related to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a state relating to AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, step 1435 in FIG. 22). Step 1439, Step 1443, the state relating to the AT determined in Step 1444-3 and Step 1444-4 in FIG. 23 are set). Next, in step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command related to the state set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the process for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in Step 1416, Step 1428 in FIG. 21, Step 1438 in FIG. 22, and Step 1444-1 in FIG. In addition, when the state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-side, it is not always necessary to transmit the state, and the state related to the AT may be transmitted to the sub-side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantage section”) in the game (the game section determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a subtank (not shown) for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and a determination is made based on current conduction / non-conduction by a plurality of full detection sensors provided in the subtank (via the medal). If the current is conducted, it is determined to be full). If Yes in step 1209, the process proceeds to step 1218.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error with a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the current from the sub tank is non-conductive and the set / reset button M30 has been pressed). To do. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), The process proceeds to 1218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1214, the process proceeds to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits the medal insertion acceptance (the insertion operation is automatically executed in the next game of the re-gamer), and the next process (step 1220). The process proceeds to (1). Here, in Step 1218, the blocker D100 is turned on (process formed by the medal flow path). Specifically, when a re-game player is established in the previous game, the blocker D100 is turned on on the condition that the current storage number (credit) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Run. In other words, when the current storage number (credit) is a predetermined value, the ON process of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With this configuration, even when a re-game player is established, if the number of stored credits does not reach a predetermined value, a game medal can be inserted, such as “RT1”. When you are staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) with a higher probability of winning a re-gamer than in the RT state, or re-playing role that is difficult to understand as a re-playing player Even if the bell-bell-bell on the invalid line or the symbol combination in which the cherry is stopped on the left reel is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without a sense of incongruity).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal is not betted or stored (no credit is present). In the case of Yes in Step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display conditions in Step 1221 (for example, the conditions are satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C 100 of the main control board M is set to a setting display LED (not shown, but may be a payout number display device D 270, a credit number display device D 200, or an insertion number display light D 210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. It should be noted that when the transition condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the setting change mode is started to the sub-control board S side, and when the end condition for the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is set. A process for transmitting a command indicating that the process is to be terminated is executed. In the case of No in step 1220 or step 1221, in step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management related to game medal insertion and settlement. Next, in step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of game medals that can be accepted. Next, in step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in this embodiment, the medal is inserted). There are two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been accepted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the credit is the upper limit number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). If the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be off (a state where no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230, the process in step 1230 is repeated, and if no in step 1226 or step 1227, the process proceeds to step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are remaining credits or bet gaming medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and the game The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is being performed). If Yes in step 1236, the process proceeds to step 1247. Here, although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, only the remaining number of credits is to be settled when the previous game was a re-game player.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing of step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not a situation where it is determined that a medal has not been paid out has continued for a predetermined time despite transmission of a hopper drive signal to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). Determine whether or not. If YES in step 1241, in step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No at step 1245, the process proceeds to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1247, in step 1248, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233. If step 1241 or step 1247 is No, the process proceeds to step 1236.

  On the other hand, if No in Step 1232 or Step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M has a valid start lever D50 in Step 1251 (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting a game have been inserted, etc.) ) And whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M performs processing for acquiring random numbers and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a setting value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the result is No in step 1251, the process proceeds to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a state in which the AT can be added and lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT that can execute the AT addition lottery are “AT in-progress state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialization precursor state”, “Advantageous BB state”, The “advantageous BB inside game” is configured such that the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from making it difficult for the player not to make the symbol combination of the BB intentional in the “advantageous BB inside game”. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a lottery by adding AT in “advantageous BB inside game”. In such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in “advantageous BB inside game”. Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately but to notify that the BT is completed and that the AT is added and the lottery is won, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games is added.

  In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game number addition execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the process proceeds to step 1400. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table depending on the state related to the AT, but the lottery probability does not vary depending on the set value (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery. Next, in step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a conditional device number management process, which will be described later.

  Here, states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The “low probability state” is a state in which an AT has not been won (a right to shift to an “AT state” has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. Note that the “low probability state” is a so-called “normal state” and may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state where the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, the BB combination is not won, and the AT lottery is not selected. (3) “Normal BB state” means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the situation where the BB role is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, Or it is a state executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside game”. (4) The “high probability state” is a state where the AT lottery is not won (the right to move to the “AT state” is not acquired) and the bonus combination is not won. In this state, it is easier to win the AT than the “low probability state” described above. As will be described later, when the state is newly shifted to the “high probability state”, the state is configured such that the state does not shift to the “low probability state” until the number of highly secured games has elapsed (5) “AT state” "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of AT remaining games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if the winning lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter and the “AT in-progress state” continues (6) “specialized sign state” Is a state in which the right to shift to the “additional special state”, which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added, is acquired rather than the “AT state”. (7) “Additional special state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily increased compared to the “AT state”. (8) “Advantageous BB inside game” means winning in the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specializing sign state” or “additional special state”, and the BB role You have not won a prize. (9) “Standby BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role is won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery is won by the BB role, and the BB role is not won. . (10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role that is won by the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “addition special state”. When the display is stopped, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “advantageous BB inside game”, or the BB combination is won in the “low probability state”, and When the AT lottery is won by the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “standby BB inside game” It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) “Restorable / prohibiting effect state” is a state related to AT that shifts when the AT counter value is 0 and the continuous lottery described later is not won. In the “Restorability Produce State”, a resurrection lottery described later is executed, and when the resurrection lottery is won, the state shifts to “AT state” (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. If you win, you will move to a “low probability state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel rotation start preparation process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1260, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is requested to create a pull-in point (required to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order). And the other reels are appropriately requested according to the stop position of the other reels). In the case of Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the process proceeds to step 1263. In this way, in the “BB inside game”, in the game winning the push order bell, the stop button was not stopped in the correct push order of 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1) Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the wrong answer), there are 11 symbol combinations to be paid out by the reel stop control. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptance check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. In the case of Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). Then, the process proceeds to step 1266. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. In the case of Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the displayed symbol combination is normal (if it does not coincide with the winning combination determined by the internal lottery, it is abnormal. Is determined). If Yes in step 1269, the process proceeds to step 1274. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game medal payout process by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out game medals {the game medals earned by winning the prize exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1277, the process proceeds to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the processing timing in step 1276). . In the case of Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a medal empty error display with a 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in Step 1282, in Step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to OFF). Move to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process proceeds to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal on which the payout operation has been performed is completed). In the case of Yes in step 1286, in step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1290. If No in step 1279 or step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. Next, in step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning that becomes Yes in step 1275) is completed. If Yes in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277. If No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400. If No in step 1290, the process proceeds to step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game section transition control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing the number of bets, a game state transition process, etc.), and proceeds to the next process (step 1202 process).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which a winning number, a numerical value for comparison with the obtained random number, and the like are stored). Then, the process proceeds to step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. The winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a small role are both won, or a bonus and a replaying player are both won, both the winning / replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same appearance group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board M. It is remembered. For example, the winning group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the same number is set for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6 that are push-order re-game players. Since the above-mentioned number is the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay game combination is 3, and the push order bell The number of repetitions related to the combination is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when winning numbers 4-6, which are push order re-games, and the lottery table used when winning numbers 7-12, which are push order bells, are acquired as a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout group number related to the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery is won (whether or not the acquired random number exists in the internal lottery table searched this time). In the case of Yes in step 3614, since it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, the subsequent internal lottery table address is not determined (lottery) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1259). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of step 3610 to step 3618 is repeatedly executed until there is no remaining number of repetitions or the internal lottery is won. If NO in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), moves to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. The subsequent processing is executed. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of Step 1500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state”, or “addition special state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the game group number related to the game is an additional role during AT (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the “AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a payout group number (1, 3 in this example) regarding replay-B, replay-C, and winning-D. If Yes in step 1504, the process proceeds to step 1514. Further, in the case of No in step 1502, in other words, if the state relating to AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the outgoing group number relating to the game is the upper part of the BB (" Whether or not it is the winning group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I in this example, which is the winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games in the “favorable BB state” Determine. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. In the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is “additional special state”. In the case of Yes in Step 1506, in Step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M can add the number of AT games remaining in the special role group number for the game (in the “Specialization state for addition”) and In “AT state”, it is a winning number that does not increment the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is a replay-A, replay-D1-D3, winning-A1-A6). It is determined whether or not (2, 13 in this example). If Yes in step 1508, the process proceeds to step 1514. If step 1506 or step 1508 is No, the process proceeds to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and determines the AT extra game number based on the game group number related to the game (for example, in the margin) In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether or not the latched random value falls within the range). Note that determining the number of AT extra games is also referred to as executing an AT extra lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined AT added game number to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the added AT counter value in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M receives a command related to the determined AT added game number (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not the number of AT games has been added and how many games have been added), and the process proceeds to step 1518. It should be noted that a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT extra lottery) can also be executed in the case of a payout group number 7 to 11 which is a payout group number related to a win number (winning numbers 19 to 27) including a bonus. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the figure is an example of the extra game number lottery table at the time of winning, and in this embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ In the case of the winning combination in the winning state in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB state”), based on the appearance group number related to the game, As the number of AT added games, “0” to “300” are determined by lottery, and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. When “0” is determined, the AT remaining game number does not increase (when “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  Further, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT added games when winning the winning combination at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, {place number (600) × AT additional game number (0) + placement number (100) × AT additional game number (10) + placement number (300) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number ( 24) × AT addition number of games (100)} / total number of entries (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is re-game-B or re-game-C, {place number (500) × AT extra game number (0) + place number (200) × AT extra game number (50) + Number (300) × AT additional game number (100) + Number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of positions (1024) = 46.1 (game) be able to.

  Next, if the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, {number (300) × AT extra game number (10) + number (600) × The number of AT extra games (30) + the number of places (124) × the number of AT extra games (50)} / the total number of places (1024) = 26.61 (game). In addition, when the winning combination is re-game-A or re-game-D1-D3, winnings-A1-A6, the number of AT games is added only when the status related to AT is "addition specialization state" It has become.

  Next, if the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (800) × AT added game number (0) + place number (100) × AT added game number (10) + place number (100 ) × AT additional game number (30) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (100)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB medium rare role, {number (300) × AT added game number (0) + number (300) × AT added game number (30) + number (400) ) × AT additional game number (50) + placement number (24) × AT additional game number (300)} / total number of placement numbers (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In this embodiment, when the AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the AT extra game number may be different depending on the type of the winning combination, but depending on the set value, the AT extra game number may be different. The average value is configured not to be different. Here, in the case where the AT addition lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT extra lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. However, as shown in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are configured by performing the AT lottery based on the appearance group number as in the present embodiment. When the same process is executed as an AT extra lottery, the process related to the AT extra lottery of the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 is executed only by determining whether the payout group number is 2 or not. Will be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may make a determination based on a winning number (or winning / replaying winning information, a winning group number, etc.) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not it is a winning number related to re-game-B (reverse-play white 7 replay which is a re-game in which white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by reverse-press). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games due to replay-B, in other words, the number of AT additional games due to winning of replay-B is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by reverse pressing instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and reverse pressing ("right → middle → left")). To perform the effect of instructing to align white seven), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the reverse push (“right → middle → left”) which is a reverse push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect that prevents white seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to step 1526. In the case of No in step 1518, the process proceeds to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number related to the game (or may be determined by winning / replaying winning information, or a payout group number, etc.) as replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward-pressed black 7 replay, which is a re-game where the black seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping by forward-pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is an additional number of AT games by replay-C, in other words, the number of additional games AT by winning replay -C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M makes an invalid line by a forward press instruction command (command to the sub control board S side and forward press ("left → middle → right")). To perform the effect of instructing to align the black seven), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command other than the forward press avoidance command (command to the sub control board S side, forward press (“left → middle → right”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect to prevent the black seven from being aligned on the invalid line is set), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). Even in the case of No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). In this embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoid command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoid command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands, thereby Although it is configured to be able to execute effects related to push order navigation on the control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this, and when winning an AT extra lottery, the fact that the AT extra lottery is won and the number of AT extra games is affected. When a command (for example, a command related to the number of AT additional games related to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side receives the command, push-sequence navigation on the sub-control board S side You may comprise so that the execution timing and production aspect of production may be determined. As an example, the replay-B is a game that has been won, and an effect mode in which reverse pressing is instructed in a game that has received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games) is selected. In the game that receives the command on the side of the sub-control board S, an effect that instructs reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific re-game player (for example, replay) You may comprise so that the effect which instruct | indicates the pushing order in which 7 alignment can be performed in an invalid line in the game which satisfied game-B or C) was won may be performed. Or, in the game where the re-game-B is won and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, (For example, display on the effect display device S40) in a game satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed simultaneously, in this case, the final game of the continuous effect). (For example, “+ 30G” is displayed.) In this example, the number of AT remaining games is also displayed in the effect display device S40. Such a display can be displayed, and the display and the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side may be the same or different from each other. B won In a game where the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), an effect of instructing reverse pressing is not executed, and a game satisfying a predetermined condition thereafter As an example of the case where the AT game number addition effect is executed, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) is given on the sub-control board S side to win a bonus (replay game inside the bonus- Since the winning probability of B is low (including 0%), the sub-control board S side will be special, for example, if a player is notified of the push order in which 7 matches are possible, the bonus will not be won) Information that the sub-control board S side determines that the main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the AT remaining game number is added, is as follows. (1) AT remaining game The information on the number is added to the AT and sent after the lottery from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board S side sends the information on the number of AT remaining games sent last time and the AT remaining game sent this time. The difference with the number information is calculated, and the number of AT added games won in the AT added lottery is grasped. (2) The command related to the number of AT added games obtained as a result of the AT added lottery on the main control board M side is added. In addition, when the AT extra lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT extra lottery is not won is sent to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side When receiving a command, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine an effect mode of an effect related to push order navigation, for example, a game in which Re-Game-B is won. Then, in the game that received the command on the side of the sub-control board S (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the push order to avoid the seven matches) You may comprise so that the production | generation aspect which instruct | indicates may be selected and performed. In addition, although the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, as information for the sub control board S side to determine that the AT remaining game number was not added, (1) information on the AT remaining game number After the AT addition lottery, the data is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Thereafter, the sub-control board S calculates the difference between the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time and the information regarding the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT additional games won in the AT addition lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information related to the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) the main control board As a result of the M-side AT extra lottery, a command related to the fact that the number of AT extra games is 0 is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state relating to the AT capable of performing AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state related to the AT that can execute the AT lottery is only the “high probability state”. By winning the BB in the “high probability state”, the “advantageous BB internal game” Then, when the BB combination wins, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”, and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the “AT state” and the AT counter shows the initial number of AT games. The value 50 times will be set. In addition, even if BB is won in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “normal BB internal game” and does not shift to “AT state” thereafter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won in the “normal game state”, the AT lottery may be won by using the BB combination as a trigger. In such a configuration, when BB is won in the “normal game state”, if the AT lottery is won with the BB role as an opportunity, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” and then BB By aligning, it shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In addition, in a state in which the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be an “advantageous section” or a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery combination (in this example, the first type BB-A or the first type BB combination with no setting difference) It is determined whether or not the seed BB-C). In the present embodiment, the winning number of the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers 19, 24) and the winning number with the same setting number as the BB with no setting difference (winning numbers, 25, 26, 27). Both are AT lotteries. In the case of Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also in the case of No in step 1402 or step 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate related to AT lottery (whether or not it can be won or not) is different when the state related to AT is different, but when the state related to AT is the same. Even if the set values are different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (if the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = It shifts to “AT state”).

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion role (by winning, a small state that can shift from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not it is a hand and is a cherry) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is elected with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is ½ and there is no problem if it is changed if it is not different depending on the set value). Execute a high probability state transition lottery. Next, in step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  In the case of No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the high securement fault counter KHc to the 10th game after the counter value of the high securement fault counter KHc is 1 (the high securement fault final game is “high probability state”). ). In the case of Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the push order is The “advantageous section” is configured not to end unless the navigation is executed one or more times or a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games) “advantageous section” is not satisfied. Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the “high-probability state” is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because, for example, the push order navigation has not been executed more than once. ). If the BB role is elected during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be selected at any timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. You may be comprised so that it may complete | finish. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low probability transition condition is satisfied when the push order navigation is executed once. In addition, as a push order (a winning number where the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the player's profit rate is different), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 is provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the push order navigation with the maximum payout number of 11 having the maximum payout number is executed once. Note that the process proceeds to step 1430 even when the result of step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428 is No. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new transition is made to the “high probability state”, 10 games that are highly secured obstacle games are set in the highly secured obstacle counter KHc, and the counter value becomes zero. Is configured not to enter the “low probability state”. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high probability state”, the low probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games (staying in the “high probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery that shifts from a “high probability state” to a “low probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed may be executed. It should be noted that the AT lottery (low-accuracy AT lottery, high-accuracy AT lottery) and the state promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is an “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to AT is “AT state”, the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of AT remaining games is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the right to transition to the “specialized state of specialization” can be acquired with a probability of ½ when winning, and the state related to the AT is “in-AT state” When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if winning the watermelon B, a lottery (specializing) (Which may also be referred to as state transition lottery), and is not configured to shift to the “specialization sign state” and “additional special state”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to transfer to the “additional special state” (also referred to as a special state transfer lottery) May be configured so that the watermelon B is won in the situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less and the right to transition to the “additional specialization state” is granted. When winning the lottery to be won, it may be configured so that the next game winning the lottery can be (specialized sign state) or “additional special state” (can move to), or the AT counter value It may be configured to be able to enter (or move to) a “specialized sign state” or “additional special state” when the game becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game won in the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games, Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). In addition, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization sign state” when shifting to the “additional special state”. For example, the configuration is such that it can directly shift from the “AT special state” to the “additional special state” May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a lottery that acquires the right to transfer to the special transition role ("addition special state") for the condition device related to the game. It is determined whether it is a watermelon B) in this example. In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/2). Next, in step 1434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game as “specialized sign state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in Step 1431, in Step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (when the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game is set). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, in step 1438, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1 (the AT state transition enable condition is set). In order to satisfy, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as the “restoration effect state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1444-1 also in the case of No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game and the continuous lottery is won, 50 games as initial values are set again in the AT counter M60. In other words, if the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the gameability is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop at 2/3. The execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, after the initial value is set in the first game of the AT (the first game that is newly in “AT state” or the AT counter M60). A continuous lottery may be executed in the first game). With such a configuration, it is already determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) is executed (whether or not the AT continues) in the “AT state”. The effect during the AT can be made different between the case where the continuous lottery is won and the case where the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 However, it is possible to change the BGM (songs are played, etc.) in a situation of 1 or more (while the AT is running) or to perform an effect that makes it definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of Step 1400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is a state for reproducibility effect. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 144444, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device relating to the game is selected in the next game by winning in the reviving role ("Restorability Prompt State"). It is determined whether or not it is a role that can shift to the “AT state”, in other words, a role that can return the AT. Here, in the present embodiment, the reviving role includes any of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and bonus combination (only the BB role with no setting difference and does not include the BB role with setting difference). In the case where the condition device relating to the game becomes a revival role, it is said that the revival lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2, in step 1444-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the state relating to the AT after the next game is “AT in-process state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transition enabling condition. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game as “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1445 also in the case of No in step 1441-1. As described above, in this embodiment, even when the game is an AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state transitions to the “Restorability Prompt State” and is revived in the “Restorability Prompt State”. If a lottery can be won, the game is shifted to the “AT state” from the next game. Note that the “Restorability Produce State” is “Advantageous Section”, but the lottery related to the AT in the “AT During State” (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed. In the “AT state” and “Restorability effect state”, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state related to the AT after the next game has not been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. Satisfies when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state related to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is exhausted in the “precursor state”, it will be determined as “specialized state”. Note that if the answer is No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M guarantees a high reservation fault counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub-side, in other words, the current high reservation fault counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed. The command relating to the number of remaining games) is set, and the flow proceeds to Step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game is determined as “advantageous BB internal game”. In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1450). Even in the case of No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is different depending on the lottery status. If the BB role (BB role without setting difference) is won in the “low probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won. No (after that, it does not shift to the “AT state”) On the other hand, if the BB role (BB role without setting difference) is won in the “high probability state”, the AT transition lottery is won (then it is changed to “AT state” However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, serves as an AT lottery role, and “high probability state A” and “high probability” are states related to the AT that is the “advantageous section”. When the condition device A is won in the “high probability state A”, the AT transition lottery is won at 1/10, and the condition device in the “high probability state B”. If you win A, you will be placed in the AT transfer lottery by 1/2. It may be configured so as to be selected. If the AT transfer lottery is won, the state relating to AT shifts to “AT ready state” which is a preparation state until the state shifts to “AT in-progress state”, and then a predetermined end condition (for example, “AT ready state”). It may be configured to transition to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is a command related to winning / replaying winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, winning / replaying winning related to the game) Set commands related to information. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has a condition device related to the game in a pushing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pushing order, for example, winning-A1 etc.). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the order of pressing, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that the instruction number is determined (not shown, but the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number) even when the push order navigation is not executed. In addition, when a pushing order hitting game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pushing order hitting game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). (See Figure 34 for image). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side). In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels that is most profitable to the player in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as push order navigation, push order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the push order display device D270. In both of the push order bell and the push order replay, “= 1” is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and the game related to the push order replay You may comprise so that it may become a display mode different from the case where the push order navigation of "left-> middle-> right" is displayed on the push order display apparatus D270. That is, the number of types of display of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning / replay winning information.

  If NO in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a mask process on the winning / replaying winning information of the game, and the masked information is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM. To remember. Here, when the winning / replaying winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / replaying winning information is recognized by an illegal act, the high profit related to the game is increased. That is, the pushing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after executing the mask process {the process for concealing the winning / replay winning information (especially the information relating to the pressing order)) to the winning / replaying winning information related to the game. It is configured so that a highly profitable push order cannot be recognized. As a mask processing method in this embodiment, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information (winning / replaying winning information having the same role is preferable. For example, the RT state shifts depending on the pressing order. A plurality of winning / replaying winning information that can be stopped and displayed as a combination of symbols to be replayed as a single effect group number (for example, winning / replay winning information 4 to 6 is set as a directing group 4) The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The mask processing method is not limited to this. For example, after the winning / replay winning information provided (0 to 18 in this example), a new winning / replaying after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also in such a case, a plurality of winning / replaying winning information among the existing winning / replaying winning information like the production group number is used as a single winning / replaying winning information after winning / replaying after masking. It is desirable to provide game winning information (for example, winning / replaying winning information 4 to 6 is changed to winning / replaying winning information 19 which is winning / replaying winning information after mask processing)・ Replay winning information)). If it is determined that the game is a game for notifying operation information (push order navigation) based on the state related to the AT on the main control board M, the winning / replaying winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the production group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets in the register area). 1472 is entered. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to bonus winning information (whether or not the bonus has been won can be recognized on the sub side) (for example, Set in the register area) and proceed to the next process (the process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number. The derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, examples of the display of the push order navigation include: (1) When a fall re-playing role is included → Push where a fall re-playing role is not stopped and displayed In the case of navigation in order, (2) in the case of a bell (one-piece combination / 11-piece combination) → the navigation order in which the number of payouts becomes the largest is navigated. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game section is an “advantageous section”, winning / re-game winning information (the type of winning combination and the pushing order most advantageous for the player) In the case where the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S is configured to transmit the instruction number (the number that can specify the pushing order most advantageous for the player). The production group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) can be transmitted to the side. That is, in the “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying winning information related to the game including the winning / replaying winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pushing order is directly used as the sub-control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an “advantageous section”, the winning / replaying information for the game is not transmitted, and the winning / replaying in which the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order. In the case of winning information, the production group number in which the information related to the order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  When the game section is not an “advantageous section”, the effect group number is determined by executing the mask process when the winning / replay winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number refers to winning / replaying winning information, winning / replaying winning information related to a winning role having a similar role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a push order bell, etc.). Are grouped and assigned numbers. A mask process {process for concealing winning / replay winning information (especially information relating to the pressing order)} is performed on the winning / replaying winning information related to the game, and then transmitted to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the information related to the winning / replaying winning information is recognized due to an illegal act and the pushing order (reel stop order) which is a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) that should be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). It is a timer that measures. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts by setting a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears information related to the reel stop order related to the finished game and information related to the press order. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop related to the finished game and the pull-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, in step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request at the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game. In other words, a command for indicating that the reel starts to rotate can be transmitted to the sub-control board S by the processing of Step 1562 and Step 1564. Next, in step 1566, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state stored in the RAM area from the reel stop state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). Transition.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and the situation of the game that is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to the AT is “at-AT state” It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 (which is a decrement counter and 1500 which is the maximum number of games that can stay in the “favorable section” is the initial value. 1 is subtracted from the counter value which is set as a value and can be subtracted every game during the period of “advantageous section”.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state relating to the AT is the “AT in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by 1. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the high securing fault counter KHc, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1700). It should be noted that if the result is No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the game AT counter value is subtracted, but the “advantageous BB state”, “ In the case of “advantageous BB inside game”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, the AT counter value is not subtracted even if the game is executed. In other words, when the AT counter value remains (1 or more remain) and the state shifts from the “AT in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the AT counter value is maintained and the “AT in-progress state” is maintained. It is configured to be able to transition (transition) from “state” → “specialized sign state” → “addition special state”. Even if the state relating to AT is “AT state”, it is possible not to decrement the AT counter value by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. You may control. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT extra lottery (note that “α” obtained by the extra lottery is , In a specific game after the game (a game satisfying a predetermined condition at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the bonus game ends) without notifying the game. And “α” may be notified.) Then, the number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also subtracted by 1 for each game even in the “advantageous BB inside game”, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) suggesting the bonus confirmation is output. The number of remaining AT games can be subtracted for each game. With this configuration, when a bonus is won in a state in which push order navigation such as “AT state” can be executed, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping the bonus winning. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games can be executed using the effect display device S40 or the like to inquire whether or not the bonus has been won, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Note that the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is ended is "30" or a value of "30" or more when notifying the result of adding and adding the result of the AT extra lottery. Can be controlled to display. If the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display related to the number of remaining AT games is “0”, but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is performed to determine whether or not the bonus is won, and the AT counter value is “1”. The winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the winning group number) where the game is executed when the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1” and the AT addition lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games is “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is “0”. Further, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the probability of executing a continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition enabling conditions are RAM clear execution (RAM initialization), replay stop display (in this example, replay 04 stop display), BB win / start・ It is configured to be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not to transition to the RT state and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enabling condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be shifted when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning to the RT state (stores the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states of “RT0” to “RT2” and “1 type BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. Will be transferred. As a specific transition example of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, RAM initialization is executed, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state transitions to “RT0”. The replay 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the left stop button is operated as the first stop when the “replay-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT1”. The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, if “Re-Game-D1” is won in the situation where the RT state is “RT 1”, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the re-play 04 is stopped and displayed. The RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  In addition, when the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, if the BB role is won and the BB role is not won in the winning game (the condition device relating to Type 1 BB-A to C operates) The RT state shifts to “RT2”. In addition, when the BB combination is won at “RT2” (1 type BB-A to C are activated), the process shifts to “1 type BB-A, B, C”. Further, when “BB is finished at“ 1 type BB-A, B, C ”” (the operation of 1 type BB-A to C is finished), the process shifts to “RT1”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state”, the BB is won, and when the BB is ended, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. The state is a state in which no push order navigation occurs, so when “Replay-D1 to D3” is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is three choices: left button, middle button, right button, 1 of 3 choices is correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and 2 of 3 choices are incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped)) By stopping, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is shifted to “RT0”. In addition, when the state related to AT is “high probability state”, “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, RT state Will shift to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state where push navigation occurs, and even when “Regame-D1 to D3” is won, Since it navigates the order of pushing correct answers that are not stopped, “RT1” can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transition enabling condition is satisfied in the game. Note that the AT state transition enable conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no setting difference that was won in the “high probability state” is finished, (2) when winning the continuous lottery, and (3) winning the reviving lottery. Satisfies if In the case of Yes in step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in step 1754 triggers the new transition to the “AT precursor state”, and the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50, The number of games for which subtraction is started after shifting to the “state” is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow proceeds to step 1756. In the case of No in step 1752, the process proceeds to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high secure fault games (10 in this example) to the high secure fault counter and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3500). Transition. Note that if the answer is No in step 1756 or 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the “high probability state” and moving to “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB is awarded to shift to the “advantageous BB state”, and in the “advantageous BB state”, the AT game When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 when the BB ends and shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the “advantageous BB state” and then shifts to the “AT state”, 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set in the AT counter. become. At this time, if an effect is given to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”, at the start of the “AT state”, the player is informed that the number of AT initial games is 80 games. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the initial value is set at the start of the “AT state” without performing the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is notified that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the “AT state” or the state where the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method for performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know how many games have been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in the extra effect that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push order navigation can occur). In this example, the AT initial game number is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754. However, the execution timing of the process for setting the AT initial game number is not limited to this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-described AT state transition control process in Step 1400. Further, the number of games (AT initial number of games) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from when the game after the BB is finished (the state relating to AT is “AT state”). (No subtraction starts during BB). The counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state” ”,“ Advantageous BB Inside Game ”,“ Advantageous BB State ”, and“ Restorability Produce State ”, there are 10 AT-related states. The state will transition. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as a game section, three states relating to ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal section”, “high probability state”, “AT in progress” The states related to the seven ATs of “state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “revival effect state” are “advantageous sections” Is set. In other words, even if the states related to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” have been transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, when the “AT state” is set, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0, and when the continuous lottery is not selected, the “recovery / prohibition effect state” is set. When the revival lottery is won in the “Restorability Produce State”, it is possible to return to the “AT State” again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the “Restorability Produce State”, the state shifts to the “Low Probability State” and changes from “Advantaged Section” to “Normal Section”.

  When the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won in the “high probability state” and the BB without setting difference is activated and the “advantageous BB state” ends, ”. Also, when the “AT state” BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Transition to “AT state”. In the “Restorability Prompt State”, when BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is won, BB without setting difference is activated and “Advantageous BB State” ends. Also shifts to the “AT state” (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, when the BB with the setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won in the “Restorability Producing State”, the BB with the setting difference is activated, and the “Advantageous BB State” is finished, the BB with the setting difference is alone. If the winning number related to the BB role (winning number 20) is “low probability state” after the end of the BB (because there is a setting difference, the BB role will not win the revival lottery), and there is a setting difference BB is rare If the winning number overlaps with the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), it becomes “AT state” after the end of the BB (in order to win the revival lottery with the rare role).

  In addition, when it is an “advantageous section” and a “high probability state”, when a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, the BB with a setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, Transition to the “high probability state”.

  In addition, the state related to the AT that is shifted after the “advantageous BB state” is ended is the state after the end of the BB that has been elected during the AT (“AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “addition special state”). (Both with BB and no setting difference BB) shift to a state related to AT at the time of BB winning among “AT state”, “specialized sign state” or “addition special state” and non-AT state ( After the BB with no setting difference won in the “high probability state”), the state shifts to the “AT state”. In addition, when there is a setting difference that is won during non-AT (“high probability state”) and BB ends, the state shifts to “high probability state”.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise. In addition, a “standby section” that is different from the “advantage section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case of a game where AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, If “BB + Cherry” with a duplicate of cherry and cherries is won, and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins is set as “standby section”. May be. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether the player is present or not can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game. It has two game sections, an “advantageous section” which is a profitable section. As an explanation of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the game section corresponding to the current AT state and the current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3508, in other words, when the game section is “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 being zero. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “favorable section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (therefore, the AT counter value becomes 0 and the number of staying games in the “specialized sign state”). Things are also 0). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an “advantageous section” end condition other than when the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. Or when the push order navigation is executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the routine proceeds to step 3515. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the “advantageous section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to AT (number of AT continuing games, number of AT remaining games, etc.) All the information relating to (3) is cleared, so that the conditions for becoming an “advantageous section” again in the subsequent “normal section” are not relaxed. Note that information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating a gaming state, and the like. The information is also cleared by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. However, depending on the clearing of the RAM when the setting is changed, the “conditional device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)” or “RT state” In addition, the information related to “number of stored items” is also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), “condition device related to the continuous accessory operating device (BB)” or “RT state” , Information related to “stored number” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of changing the setting is different from the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, when the process of step 3515 is executed). In addition, you may comprise so that "condition apparatus which concerns on an accessory continuous action | operation apparatus (BB)" and "RT state" may be hold | maintained by RAM clear at the time of a setting change. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared in the clear process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as information indicating that the game was “advantageous section” and how many games “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of setting change is executed, game history such as information on the “advantageous section” on the side of the sub-control board S and information on how many games “AT state” is executed Will also be deleted.

  When the “favorable section” is ended because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0, (1) when the current AT state is the “high probability state”. If the state related to the AT is “low probability state” in the next game, and (2) the state related to the current AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the state related to the AT in the next game is “ (3) If the current AT state is “Advantageous BB state”, the AT state will be “Normal BB state” in the next game. (4) Current If the AT state is “AT in progress state”, “specialization sign state”, “addition special state” or “restoration effect state”, the AT state in the next game is “low probability” State "(AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game section after the next game as the “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “favorable section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. The advantageous section indicator YH is turned off when the “favorable section” is finished and set to the “normal section”, but the detailed timing of turning off the light is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal related to a game that becomes the “normal section” after the “advantage section” ends. In other words, the advantageous section indicator YH may be configured to be turned off before the start lever D50 capable of starting the next game is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set the “advantageous section” in the next game (decided to set the “advantageous section” from the “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value to be set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534. However, the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. The timing is from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the “advantageous section” (game in the “regular section”) to the timing when a game medal can be inserted in the new “advantageous section” game ( If the game before the “advantageous section” is a game related to replay, it is set as appropriate during the period of time until the start lever operation in the new “advantageous section” becomes effective) Also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when a timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104. Thereafter, a predetermined time (in this example, T is set, but a time of about 2 ms is set, for example) To be periodically executed.

  First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of interruption (for example, saving of data held in a register in the CPUC100, input port check of a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, in step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power-off is currently detected (in the current interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting / reset button M30, the power-off detection signal, the input acceptance sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence / absence of the operation of these operation members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). )

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. (For example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously ON over a plurality of samplings, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise by turning on the door switch flag. Can also be detected). Next, in step 1611, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the spinning drive control process (process related to the drive control of the reel M50) for all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53). . Next, in step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If YES in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the AT remaining game number (AT game number) on the AT counter value display device D 280, and proceeds to step 1614. Note that if the answer is No in Step 1612, the process proceeds to Step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing in step 1612 and step 1613 is not necessary. Next, in step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormality error flag, It is determined whether all flags relating to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off. In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, register Set in the area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side and a command that an error is detected) (for example, Set in the register area), and the process proceeds to Step 1622. In step 1620, information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub-side. The error not detected command may be set only when the error is released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off). The information setting process may not be executed (the step 1618 may not be provided). Further, the error detection command may execute the set process only when an error occurs from a state where no error has occurred, or from the state where a first error (for example, a inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error has changed, such as a second error (for example, a payout medal retention error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set). Control command). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) A command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Sent immediately after operation), sent immediately after all reels stop), commands related to stop timing of stop display symbols (sent immediately after operating the stop button as a display symbol stop), winning / replaying Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after start lever operation (limited to advantageous sections)), bonus winning Commands related to information (sent immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted after all reels stop until the next game starts), commands related to the state related to AT (Sent from the time all reels stop until the next game is started), high fault counter value command (sent immediately after the start lever operation), command related to the number of AT remaining games (all Commands from the time the reels stop until the next game starts, or immediately after the start lever is operated), commands related to the game section (from when all reels stop until the next game starts Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the revolving game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, information relating to an error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormality error, a dispensing abnormality error, a closing reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door opening error is configured to be an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. The insertion acceptance sensor retention error is when the insertion acceptance sensor detects the retention of a game medal. Is configured to cause an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the output data of the LEDs (7-segment LED lamp, etc.) (for example, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit among a plurality of 7-segment LED units). Output a predetermined segment of the segment) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the LED lighting mode (for example, changing the LED lighting color). Note that step 1628 may not be executed. Next, in step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process for updating a random value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains internal information register data (the internal information register has a region where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). More specifically, the abnormality flag bit is set when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the update state of the built-in random number is normal (whether or not an abnormal flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is set). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1602). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described non-recoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off process completed flag (for example, updates the power-off process completed flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates a checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and information for error detection based on the calculated checksum (for example, the calculation) In the checksum area, the lower 1 byte in the checksum or the complement thereof) is set. Next, in step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 34 shows an example of an image diagram of the push order display of the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example. The table in the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information relating to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility. For example, the instruction number when informing “middle → right → left” as the pressing order indicates “A5”. Next, on the left side of the figure, when the push order is “left → middle → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the push order display device D270, the advantageous section display device YH, and the effect display device S40. An image displayed on the screen is illustrated. Here, the push order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method and also serves as a payout number display device. When the medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed as a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 indicates the number of medals to be paid out or not. It becomes difficult to determine whether the navigation display is displayed. For this reason, the push order display device D270 displays “=” in the left digit as “= 1” so that it can be distinguished whether the number of medals has been paid out or the push order navigation display. By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. As the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is “=” and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured so that it can be determined that the display is a push order navigation, and it is configured to prevent misidentification of the player. Further, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right of the push order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is the “favorable section” is lit. At the same time, a display of “40 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” (or “AT state”) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side of the figure shows an image displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the push order is “middle → left → right” (the corresponding instruction number is “A3”). Yes. In addition, since the current game section is an “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit, and a display of “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a combination with a push order (a condition device with a medal payout out of condition devices whose stop display is different depending on the reel stop order, for example, a bell), and a replay game with a push order (depending on the reel stop order The condition display of the instruction number of the condition device having a different combination of the stopped display may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to 7 segments. For example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs according to a lighting pattern corresponding to an instruction number using an LED display. In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with the advantageous area display YH in the lower right part of the credit amount display apparatus D200. In this case, the timing for turning on the advantageous section indicator YH is preferably until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player quits the game, he / she checks the credit number display device D200 to check whether there are any medals remaining. If there are medals remaining, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can be prevented from accidentally quitting a game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game by lighting until the settlement button D60 is activated. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and the same section display as the advantageous section display YH is provided on the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section display is provided with the section display). It is also possible to have a configuration with two). In such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, the fact that the current game section is “normal section” is notified, while the right section When the section indicator lights up, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Furthermore, “normal section” and “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, “green” in “normal section” and “red” in “advantageous section”). Or “lighting in the“ normal section ”and“ flashing ”in the“ favorable section ””). Furthermore, the display mode of the section indicator is changed according to “in-AT BB internal game”, “AT-in-BB state”, “AT precursor state”, “AT-in-state”, etc. in the “advantageous section”. May be. Furthermore, it may be configured to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “favorable section”. However, the distinction between “normal section” and “advantageous section” is made easy to distinguish, for example, by using different section indicators, and the player recognizes whether the current game section is “advantageous section” or not. It is preferable to make it easy to do.

  Further, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantageous section”, for example, in the “AT precursor state” or “AT in preparation”, the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (a disadvantage to the player that the remaining number of games in the “advantageous section” is subtracted in a relatively low profit state for the player is not notified). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section indicator is lit to notify the player that the “advantageous section” is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section indicator is installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 52, a control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described.

<Sub program start processing>
First, FIG. 35 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, and checksum calculation.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2008, in other words, in the determination process of step 2008, if it is determined that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one-command processing described later. It is determined whether or not it is a state that has returned from a state in which a power interruption has occurred, that is, whether or not it has completely recovered.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, if it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt and is executed when a power interruption occurs. Return processing to one command processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the above-described determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute. It should be noted that after the processing of step 2014 is executed, or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 36 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 35 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes one command processing which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms has elapsed, and returns to step 2108 when determining that it has not elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 37 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects a power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start process is being executed. If YES in step 2204, the process proceeds to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates a checksum in step 2206. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, the address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power supply has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of instantaneous interruption occurrences. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing one command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the operation timing of the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect related determination process for start lever operation described later. To do. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not it is the first reel stop acceptance timing. In the case of No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the first cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the second reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the second cylinder stop acceptance processing described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the third reel stop reception timing. . In the case of No in step 2262, in other words, in the case of the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine for the third related to the cylinder-stop effect-related determination process described later. And execute. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a third cylinder stop acceptance process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop reception timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop timing of the stop display symbol, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes stop display symbol time processing (not shown), and The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display symbol, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing start lever operation effect related determination processing called and executed in the processing of step 3000 in FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is a “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the high-secure fault counter value command received from the main control board M side, How many games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of battle effect execution availability determination process described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is determined that a battle effect is executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state relating to the AT of the game, the state relating to the AT of the next game, and the current number of highly secured games. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 41), a stay stage shift lottery (lottery of whether or not to change the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2300 process). Even in the case of No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT of the game is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 41) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Referring to (see), the stay stage shift lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is “AT state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a sub-routine of an effect determination process during AT which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is the “recovery / prohibiting effect state”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for determining whether or not to allow restoration, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). The stay stage is an effect mainly based on the background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and any stay stage is always set. In addition, if stay stages differ, the tendency of various effects, such as a background effect and a notice effect, will differ.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of highly secured obstacle games is four or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute a battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)) to win with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). ). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution availability lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games and wins the battle effect, that is, the battle effect (win) is executed, so that the BB role is won and the AT lottery is performed. It is structured so that winning is definitive. Note that the structure related to the battle effect is not limited to this, and when the BB role is won even if the AT lottery is not won (the state shifts to the “low probability state” or the “high probability state” after the BB ends). ) May be configured to execute a battle effect (win).

  Further, in the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare role. Here, in this example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A) and winning-E (watermelon B). It has become. That is, if the player is expected to be simultaneously elected with the BB role by displaying the rare role stopped, the answer is YES in step 3064, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in step 3066. A lottery for determining whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat) with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, in step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lottery for executing the gasse battle effect execution in step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). If NO in step 3052, step 3064, or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of highly secured obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of highly secured obstacle games is predetermined. When it is less than the number, for example, when it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect. Can be prevented from being extinguished by the transition ("normal section" is set), and only when the advantageous section indicator YH can be kept on until the battle presentation ends, the battle effect is displayed. By executing the game machine, a user-friendly gaming machine can be obtained without impairing the player's expectation for winning the BB.

  Also, when the rare role is won, it is configured to be able to execute continuous effects such as battle effects (defeats), so the execution frequency of battle effects can be guaranteed and the game will always proceed with expectation. Can do.

  Next, FIG. 41 is an example of a stay stage determination table. It should be noted that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 41 is a partial extract. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 41 is used when the game is in the “low probability state” and when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types: a table and a table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, and the corresponding set number It is prescribed. In the case of “low probability state”, the current stay stage consists of two stage stages, a desert stage and a city stage, and the transition stage includes a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states relating to the AT of the next game: a “low probability state”, a “normal BB inside game”, and a “high probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. In addition, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, the number of places is 980 to 980 when moving from the desert stage to the city stage. 999 is assigned.

  Furthermore, when the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “ordinary BB inside game”, 0 to a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 19 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and a transition is made to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as numbers for transition from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state”, 250 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state”, 500 to 749 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state”, 750 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts to the cave stage in the game.

  The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 4 or more defines the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the game, and the number of places. Has been. As the current stay stage and the stage to move to, there are four stages of production: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game moves from the desert stage to the conference room stage. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game moves from the desert stage to the cave stage, 960 to 999 is assigned.

  The current stay stage is a city stage, and 0 to 879 are assigned as numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers when the current stay stage is the city stage and the city stage is maintained in the game. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the conference room stage. The current stay stage is a city stage, and 960 to 999 is assigned as a number when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the cave stage.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 is assigned. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 is assigned as a number when the conference room stage is shifted to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the city stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is changed to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is “high probability state” and the number of highly secured obstacles is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the current game, The relationship with the numeric value is specified. As the current stay stage and the stage to move to, there are four stages of production: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: “high probability state”, “advantageous BB inside game”, and “low probability state”.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0-979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is a desert stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980-999 is set as a number when moving from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0-19 are set as numbers when the game stage shifts from the city stage to the desert stage. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 is assigned as a number when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage is 0 to 0 29 is assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage is 30 to 30 59 is assigned. When the current stay stage is a conference room stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 are set as numbers when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Assigned.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 29 is set as a number when moving from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 30 to 59 are set as numbers when the game moves from the cave stage to the city stage. Assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of places when the game moves from the cave stage to the conference room stage is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 is assigned as a number when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the game is shifted from the desert stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is a city stage and the game is shifted to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the game stage shifts to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is a city stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state”, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to a “low probability state”, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game room shifts from the conference room stage to the city stage.

  When the current stay stage is a cave stage and a transition is made to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the cave stage is shifted to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game shifts to a low probability state, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the city stage.

  Thus, when the state is the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the city stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 39). In other words, in the case of the “advantageous section”, four stay stages can be selected, while in the “normal section”, two stay stages can be selected and can be selected in the “normal section”. Two stay stages can also be selected in the “favorable section”. By configuring in this way, even in the “normal section” where the AT lottery can not be expected, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the “advantageous section”, even in the “normal section” without getting bored The gaming machine can be advanced. In addition, when transitioning from the “high probability state” to the “low probability state”, that is, when changing from the “favorable section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected at the “advantage section” stage. By selecting the production stage, it is difficult for the player to discriminate from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, and the game can be continued with expectation.

  A part of the stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps with the stage selected in the “favorable section” (the stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but not selected in the “advantage section”). It may be made to have.

  In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 4 or more is different from the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is 3 or less, so that the number of highly secured obstacle games is When there is less (3 games or less), do not move to a stay stage with a higher expectation that is an “advantageous section” than the current stay stage (for example, desert stage → conference room stage) By configuring, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by becoming a “normal section” with a small number of games, despite the transition to the stay stage with higher expectation. The stay stages are in the order of “desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage” from those with low expectation of “advantageous sections” (which are difficult to select in “advantageous sections”).

  In addition, the composition of the stay stage is not limited to the one in this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is selected as an “advantageous section” expectation degree, an expectation degree winning in the AT lottery, and a BB. It may be configured to suggest a certain degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can shift in the game won for the BB role or rare role (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT lottery is not executed by winning the single rare role) And the expected stage of winning the AT lottery is different depending on the stage of the stay, and the order is "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" Or, it may be configured so that the expected degree of winning the BB role is different depending on the stay stage that has been moved, and in the order of "desert stage, city stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in order of low expectation Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it is definite that the BB internal winning or the AT lottery is won).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the AT effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. If YES in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is an AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the effect relating to the game to the AT continuation effect (success) (the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60. Then, it is definitive that the initial value is set in the AT counter M60 by continuing the AT (the effect of notifying that the state related to the AT of the next game becomes “AT state”) or the AT continuous turning effect (failure) Otherwise, the state relating to the AT of the next game is determined to be “in-AT state” or “restoration effect state”), and the process proceeds to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (success) vs. the AT continuous production effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (failure) may be executed. In such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the revival production (success) is executed, and the player feels as if the player has won the revival lottery (actually, the continuation lottery is won and the main control board M As for the control on the side, it is the same as the case where the AT continuous production effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win a revival lottery in “Restorability Produce State”, but {win a 2320/65536 lottery (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and win a continuation effect. If the revival effect (success) is executed, the rate at which the revival effect (success) is executed can be increased, and the player expects the revival effect. A feeling can be heightened.

  If NO in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the effect related to the game is an AT continuation effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an AT end effect, and proceeds to step 3126. If NO in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuous turn production effect (failure) has been executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (similar to the revival effect (success) executed in the “recovery / prohibition effect state”). In this process, it is determined that the “state during AT” has been continued), and the process proceeds to step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the process proceeds to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds an effect related to the game (the effect of notifying that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET”) ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect during the AT (an effect executed during the AT such as “AT state”), and performs the following process ( The process proceeds to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a resurrection / prohibition effect determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3150 of FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S creates an effect related to the game as a revival effect (success) (the same effect as the effect executed in step 3116 described above, This is an effect to notify that the revival lottery has been won in the “Restorability Prompt State”, and in the next game, the “AT state” is entered and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has not won the revival lottery in the revival effect (failure) (“state for revival effect”). It is an effect to notify the effect, and it is determined that the transition to the “low probability state” will be made in the next game), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  As described above, the “Restorability Produce State” is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the “in-AT state” final game) that is the “favorable section”. Even if there is not, since the “advantageous section” is extended in the “revival availability state” as the next game, the player checks whether the advantageous area indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection effect is successful only by doing, and attention is paid to the result of the resurrection effect. Further, as described above, the lottery execution mode regarding the AT is different between the “AT state” and the “Restorability effect state”. In other words, the execution mode of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the next game won in the continuous lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed and the game won in the revival lottery in which the revival effect (success) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, the game is shifted to the “restoration effect state” of one game in the next game after the AT state is finished, and the resurrection lottery is executed in the “resusability state state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the revival effect (success) and the execution game of the revival effect (failure) are set to be “advantageous sections”, that is, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, Although it has been prevented that it can be determined whether or not the AT ends without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) Even in one game for executing the resurrection lottery, the state relating to AT is set to the “AT state”. By turning off the flag, a different lottery aspect regarding AT is set.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and is configured to determine whether or not the “AT state” is ended depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won in the control on the main control board M side, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is assumed to be a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a revival effect (success) and a revival effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of the production, “the game before the AT final game: AT continuation production (success) → AT final game: production that the next set of ATs will start”, “game before the AT final game: AT continuation production” Production (continuation to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation production (success) ”,“ Game before AT final game: AT continuation production production (failure) → AT final game: Resurrection production (success) ”,“ AT The game before the final game: AT continuous hitting production (failure) → AT final game: revival production (failure) ”may be executed. That is, on the main control board M side, it is determined whether or not the “AT state” continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. Thus, it may be configured to execute the AT continuous hitting effect and the resurrection effect.
(3) In a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, the rendition is performed in the same manner as the rebirth effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the rebirth effect (success) is obtained from the predetermined timing May be configured to notify the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, as the predetermined timing,
(1) It is a bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to a game in which a rebirth effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when a continuous lottery is won.
(2) The start lever operation timing related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect that is the same effect mode as the revival effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) The timing at which the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the first stop is turned on),
(4) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the first stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the first stop is turned on → off),
(5) The timing at which the stop button to be the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the second stop is turned on),
(6) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the second stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the second stop is turned on and then off),
(7) The timing at which the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing at which the third stop is turned on),
(8) The timing when the stop button is released after pressing the stop button that becomes the third stop related to the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed (the timing when the third stop is turned on → off),
And so on.
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival presentation (success) is executed,
Etc. In addition, when it is configured to determine by lottery which timing among the various timings (1) to (10) above, after the timing when the stop button to be the first stop is pressed. Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery is won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so the player presses the stop button that becomes the third stop and then stops the stop button. It is possible to play a game with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing at which the game is released or until the start lever operation timing related to the next game of the game in which the revival effect is executed.

<Processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 44 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process that is called and executed in the process of step 2300 of FIG.

  Next, in Step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is an AT state. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is the in-AT state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads and executes the in-AT processing at the time of start lever operation described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the in-AT state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT is a specialized precursor state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is a special sign state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads a special sign process at the time of start lever operation described later. And execute the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “specialization sign state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “additional special state”. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2306, in other words, when the state relating to the AT is “additional special state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation described later. Read and execute, and shift to the next process (process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not the “addition specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state relating to AT is “inside of advantageous BB. It is determined whether or not it is “game”. In the case of Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advantageous BB internal internal processing subroutine when the start lever is operated. Is called and executed to shift to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2307, in other words, if the state relating to AT is not “advantageous BB internal game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RT state is “RT1”. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S does not have the push order navigation (the push order navigation is not in the state related to AT). It is a state relating to an AT that does not occur and is determined to be “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, or the like. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state relating to AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. As described above, when the sub-control board S side receives the reverse push instruction command, the reverse push avoid command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoid command, it is not a configuration that can execute an effect related to push order navigation. When the AT extra lottery is won, the main control board M side transmits a command related to the AT extra lottery and the number of AT extra games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution timing and effect aspect regarding the production | presentation regarding push order navigation may be determined by the sub control board | substrate S side.

  In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in this embodiment, when the number of games has elapsed from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state has shifted to “RT1” and “low probability state”. In this case (before replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if the reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or the forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, no extra number of AT games will be generated. It is configured so that the push order that is not in a straight line is navigated. In addition, when the number of games elapses from the situation of “RT1” and “AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state changes to “RT1” and “low probability state”. The push order bell may generate push order navigation, but the push order replay may be configured not to generate push order navigation.

  If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is No in Step 2308, if No in Step 2310, if No in Step 2312, the CPUSC displays the effect image and the background image in Step 2316 based on the state related to AT. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation which is called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in step 2352, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in step 2354, and in step 2356, indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of push order bell execution and the push order navigation display of push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same) It can be applied to the case where it is configured to be displayed in (). Moreover, when comprised in that way, it is comprised so that the display image (for example, character image) different from a push order navigation display may be displayed at the time of execution of a push order navigation in the production | presentation display apparatus S40, You may comprise so that the image for production | generation different at the time of the push order navigation which concerns may be displayed, and the push order navigation which concerns on a push order replay may be displayed.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2358, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize-A1, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “left → middle → right” which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is enclosed in a circle. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not a push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the condition device of the game is a push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  In the case of No in step 2362, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, if the result of step 2366, 2364, or 2368 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT background image on the effect display device S40 in step 2370 after executing the processing of step 2360, 2364, or 2368 described above.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is three games or less. In the case of Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). A display mode that is less conspicuous than A) is displayed on the effect display device S40.

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as the push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376 or if the processing in step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the first image to avoid establishment as a push order navigation display. It displays on effect display apparatus S40 by a number display mode group.

  The CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2380 is No or when the process of step 2382 is executed.

  In the case of No in step 2372, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode that is more conspicuous than B) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, when it is 4 games or more, it is displayed in the display mode A, and when it is 3 games or less, it is displayed in the display mode B.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward press instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the processing in step 2388 has been executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be displayed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  The CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2110) when the result of step 2390 is No or when the process of step 2392 is executed. As described above, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the display of the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if a push instruction command is received, an effect that displays “Aim 7!” Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the push order in which the white seven and the black seven do not stop display on the invalid line is displayed as the first stop reel. It is configured to execute push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode for informing the player that the number of AT remaining games is small in a situation where the number of AT remaining games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, whether or not the “AT state” (a state related to an AT in which push order navigation can be performed) continues in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small (for example, Even if it is configured to execute (battle effect), it is configured so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered by configuring so that an arrow image or “Aim 7” is not displayed during the execution of the battle effect. be able to. In addition, with this configuration, even when the number of AT remaining games in the effect display device S40 is 0 and a message indicating that the “AT state” is ended after defeating the battle effect is displayed, When a forward push instruction command or reverse push instruction command is received, the forward push instruction command or reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the message indicating that the “AT state is completed” is displayed. Informs the number of AT extra games based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward black 7 replay or reverse white 7 replay). However, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special indication processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation special indication process which is called and executed in the process of step 2400 of FIG.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game in Step 2402, confirms the winning / replaying winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and in Step 2406 indicates the instruction number. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell. Here, the push order bell is any one of the above-described winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  In the case of Yes in step 2408, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct pressing order in the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A2, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “left → right → middle” which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the replay game in the push order in step 2412. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. Here, since the push order is three choices, the first stop button is information corresponding to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the forward push instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse press instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2420, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command are collectively referred to as an avoidance command. In the case of Yes in Step 2424, in other words, when an avoidance command is received, in Step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the second numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, an effect display of the AT background image is performed in step 2428. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2110).

<Specialization process for starting lever operation>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a specialization process for adding a start lever when called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads information related to the condition device relating to the game, and in step 2454 confirms winning / replay winning information relating to the game. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6, winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct push order among the six choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, in a case where the game condition device is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2462, in other words, in the case where the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay game, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a forward push instruction command. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a forward press instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → middle → right” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the push order is the forward push, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward press instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has received the reverse press instruction command. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42, and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The order of pressing can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing to.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where a reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in groups. Here, the avoidance command is a generic name for both the forward press avoidance command and the reverse press avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether a forward press avoidance command is received or a reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward press avoidance command is received, in order to avoid forward press “left → middle → right”, the number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first Information as if the one stop button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as a push order navigation display.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or when No in 2474, in step 2480, the AT background image is produced and displayed. Displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

<Advantageous processing inside the BB during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing an internal process of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated, which is called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out information related to the condition device relating to the game, and in step 2704 confirms the winning / replaying winning information relating to the game. Check the commands related to. In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed such as “AT in progress”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, When transmitting an effect group number in an AT-related state where “push order navigation” such as “probability state” is not executed (also applicable when the game section is “normal section”), the command related to the instruction number is not transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the production group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed. Based on the command, it may be configured such that the push order bell (or push order replay) is won and the correct answer push order can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (5 games) has not elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S It is determined whether the condition device is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the push order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6, winning-B.

  In the case of Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image that suggests the correct push order among the six choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. The pressing order is information in which each of the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button is associated with the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when winning the winning order winning prize -A4, a number indicating the pushing order corresponding to “right → left → middle”, which is the pushing order capable of obtaining the maximum payout number, is enclosed in stars. The display mode is displayed. The first numeric display mode group and the second numeric display mode group described above may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first numeric display mode group includes a numeric value. Can be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group can display numbers in red, and so on.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither a push order bell nor a common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the game condition. The device determines whether it is a push order replay. Here, the push order re-game is one of re-games -D1 to D3.

  In the case of Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order navigation as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct push order among the three choice push orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. Here, since the selection order is three choices, the first stop button corresponds to any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the correct answer pressing order, the number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. Is displayed, the number “1” is displayed at the center lower side of the effect display device S40. When the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the center of the effect display device S40 is located at the lower right side. The number “1” is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, push order information is displayed at a position close to the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, in the case where the game condition device is not a push order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command relating to 7 replays. It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward press instruction command, the reverse press instruction command, the forward press avoid command, and the reverse press avoid command are collectively referred to as a 7 replay command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when a command related to 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display with the first number. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, if the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described steps 2712, 2716, and 2720, or if No in step 2718, in step 2722, the AT background image is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when a predetermined game (5 games) has elapsed since the transition to the advantageous BB inside game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect display device S40. In this case, it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of first torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing the first cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the push order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, in the case where there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the forward pressing navigation or the reverse. It is determined whether or not the push order navigation related to the push navigation is being displayed. Here, 7 replays is a generic term for forward-pressed black 7 replays and reverse-pressed white 7 replays. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (the dark display is continued during the game) and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Transition.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases all the push order navigation displays and fails in the push order. The effect is executed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of 2nd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the second cylinder stop acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the second stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of a stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first in the pressing order navigation display. 2 The display relating to the stop is erased, and the next process (the process of step 2110) is entered.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. Erasing, pushing order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Third torso stop effect related decision process>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop effect related determination process that is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won a prize. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB role wins, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is won during non-AT (“low probability state” or “high probability state”). It is determined whether or not the role is BB. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of a BB combination won during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table, and Based on the state and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, with the BB role elected during the AT (“AT state”, “Addition specialization state”, “Specialization preparation state”, or “Restoration effect state”) If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the during-AT BB start effect determination table, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT state and the BB role of the game, The process proceeds to the process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB role does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 51 is a table for determining the effect at the BB start time in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: “normal BB inside game” and “advantageous BB inside game”. There are three types of BB start effects: a normal effect, a high expectation effect, and a premier effect (see FIG. 54). It should be noted that, in the BB elected during the non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the “AT state” after the end of the BB differs depending on the type of the BB start effect. → Highly expected production → Premier production.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB internal game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. When the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state relating to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will be a normal effect is 179/256 It is. If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will be a high expectation effect is 77 / 256. If the BB role is a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premier effect is 0/256 It is.

  When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect The probability of being 77/256. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect The probability is 0/256.

  When the BB combination is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect Is 157/256. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premier effect The probability is 32/256.

  When it is a “regular section”, even if you won BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) or BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) Is selected, and it is determined that the possibility of selecting the normal performance is higher than the high expectation performance.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, if a BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won, the premier effect will not be selected, and the normal effect may be selected rather than the high expectation effect It is set to be high.

  If it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) is won, there is a possibility that a premier effect will be selected. By having constituted in this way, it is decided that it will shift to "AT state" after BB without setting difference is completed by having won BB without setting difference by selecting the premier effect. Can be shown to the player. In addition, when it is an “advantageous section” and BB with no setting difference (1-type BB-A and 1-type BB-C) is won, there is a higher possibility that a high-expected stage will be selected than the normal stage. (The possibility that the normal performance is selected is reduced). By doing in this way, the player can estimate whether or not the AT is started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and can have a sense of expectation in winning the AT. It should be noted that there is a setting difference between BB (1 type BB-B) with a setting difference won in “Normal BB inside game” and no setting difference BB (win in “Normal BB inside game”). The distribution of the BB start effects according to Type 1 BB-A and Type 1 BB-C) is the same. In addition, it is not limited to this, there is a setting difference won in the “normal BB inside game” and the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (1 type BB-B) and the “normal BB inside game” The distribution of the BB start effect relating to the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring as such, the BB start with respect to the BB with setting difference The distribution can be different depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to a BB with no setting difference.

  The AT BB start effect determination table shown at the lower right of FIG. 51 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB during AT. The AT BB start effect determination table is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB role, the state relating to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB combination: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). The state relating to AT is one kind of “advantageous BB inside game”. There are two types of BB start effects: an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery can be executed during execution of BB, and the non-addition effect is an effect that suggests that the AT extra lottery is not executed during execution of BB. The BB won during the AT does not have an element as to whether or not the AT lottery is won, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the AT lottery is executed may differ. Also, during AT, there is a setting difference that the AT extra lottery is not executed. Even in the BB, the BB to be executed becomes the AT extra lottery because the game medal can be obtained and the AT is advantageous to the player after the BB ends. Is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Specific examples will be described in detail below.

  If the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect can be added is 0 / 256, and an effect that can be added is not executed. If the BB role is a setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect will not be added is 256 / 256, and an effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect can be added The probability that becomes is 256/256, and an effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect cannot be added. The probability of becoming 0/256 is that no extra effect is executed.

<Process at the time of 3rd torso stop reception>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing a third cylinder stop reception process that is called and executed in the process of step 2600 of FIG.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a push order bell. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. Determine whether there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, when there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces the pressing order success effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays “GET” "Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the push order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or in steps 2608 or 2610 When the process is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command related to the number of AT added games (command set in step 1517) is received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the command indicating the number of remaining AT games received last time. It may be configured to determine whether or not the addition of the AT game number has been executed and the AT additional game number and display the AT additional game number.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the AT display game in the effect display device S 40. The number is displayed and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, if the command related to the number of AT games is not received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds AT on the effect display device S40. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). In addition, as a method for reporting the number of added games at AT, (1) all of the added games are notified by the game, (2) a part of the added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is recorded after the game. (3) In the game, the number of additional games is not notified, and the games after the game (for example, at the time of winning 7 replays, at the time of winning the common bell (at the time of winning a role that is not added), After executing the game (continuous production), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 for the game in which the number of remaining games on the production display device S40 becomes “0”, or the game after the game that has become “0” ).

  In addition, when the common bell is won in the “specialized state of addition”, even if it is stopped according to the push order navigation, there is no display regarding the number of games added to the AT (the common bell does the AT addition lottery. Absent).

  Next, FIG. 53 shows an example of a resurrection effect image diagram of the swivel type gaming machine according to the present example.

  The continuous lottery win and the AT continuous production effect (effect indicating success) change as shown in the upper part of FIG. First, when the number of AT remaining games becomes 3 games or less, an AT end stage effect is generated (the upper left in FIG. 53). In this example, an image in which two types of characters battle is displayed as an effect.

  Next, the game continues and becomes the AT final game, and since the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuous production effect (success) is executed (in the upper part of FIG. 53). In this example, an image in which the main character of the two types of characters wins is displayed as an effect. In the next game, the next set of ATs is started (on the upper right of FIG. 53).

  Further, when winning the revival lottery without winning the continuation effect, or when winning the continuation lottery and executing the AT continual production effect (failure), changes are made as shown in the middle of FIG. First, when the number of AT remaining games becomes 3 games or less, an AT end stage effect is generated (left in the middle of FIG. 53). In this example, an image in which two types of characters battle is displayed as an effect.

  Further, the game continues and becomes the AT final game. (1) When the continuation lottery is not won, an AT continuation production effect (failure) is executed (middle of FIG. 53). In this example, an image in which the main character of the two types of characters is defeated is displayed as an effect. Thereafter, in the next game after the AT final game, a revival effect (success) is executed. In the control on the main control board M side, since the continuous lottery is won, the next set is started in the game and is the first game of the next set. (2) If the continuation lottery is not won, an AT continuation roaring effect (failure) is executed. Then, in the next game after the AT final game, the continuation lottery is not won, so the “Restorability Probability Effect” "Responsible state", and because the revival lottery is won, the revival production (success) will be executed.

  Furthermore, the continuous lottery is not won and the AT continuous production effect (failure) changes as shown in the lower part of FIG. First, when the number of AT remaining games becomes 3 games or less, an AT end stage effect is generated (the lower left in FIG. 53). In this example, an image in which two types of characters battle is displayed as an effect.

  If it is an AT final game and the continuation lottery is not won, an AT continuation production effect (failure) occurs. In this example, an image in which the main character of the two types of characters is defeated is displayed as an effect. In the next game after the AT final game, a revival effect (failure) occurs.

  Next, FIG. 54 shows an example of a BB start effect image diagram of the rotating type gaming machine according to the present example.

  When the expectation level during the AT after the BB is finished is normal (it is harder to be executed when the AT is in progress than when the non-AT is entered after the BB is finished), the normal effect of “BB start” Is executed (left of FIG. 54). When the expectation level during AT is high after BB ends (higher expectation of “Super BB start”) when it is easier to execute when AT is in progress than when non-AT occurs after BB ends Can be executed (in FIG. 54). When it is determined that the AT is in progress after the BB ends, a premier effect “Congratulations!” Can be executed (right in FIG. 54).

  Thus, when the BB is started, the expectation level during the AT after the end of the BB is shown, thereby increasing the player's expectation during the BB game. In particular, the expectation can be further enhanced by executing the premier effect when it is determined that the vehicle is in the AT state. It should be noted that such an effect that suggests whether it is during AT or non-AT after the end of BB is not limited to the mode executed at the time of winning the BB role. You may comprise so that it may be performed in the period until BB combination wins after alerting | reporting. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the BB role has been won when the BB role has been won by confirming which BB role has won (stop display mode). Can be prevented.

  By configuring as described above, according to the rotating type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “favorable section”, the period that is advantageous to the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing a “restoration effect state”, when the continuation effect is won and then the resurrection effect (success) is executed, the state regarding the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in “AT state”. On the other hand, even if the continuation effect is not won and the revival effect (failure) is subsequently executed, the revival effect (failure) is executed. When the state relating to the AT of the game to be played is set as the “restorability effect state” and the state relating to the AT is set as the “favorable zone”, the advantageous zone indicator YH is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the player so that it is difficult to recognize whether the revival effect is successful or unsuccessful by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game that executes the revival effect. In the gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify the period that is advantageous to the gaming machine, it is possible to secure a highly interesting gaming machine.

  In this example, when the BB role is won in the “high probability state”, the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, the state can be changed to the “AT state”. The configuration related to this example is not limited to the one in this example, for example, it is configured to be able to win an AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (you can win even if it is not a BB role), and if you win an AT lottery It may be configured to shift to the “AT precursor state” as the state related to the AT, and shift to the “AT state” by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “advantageous section”, a configuration that ensures the interest of the game is illustrated, but such a configuration is not included in the configuration of the present embodiment. It is not limited. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment that guarantees the fun of the game is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a symbol combination list 4 in the first modification from the present embodiment. In the first modification from the present embodiment, 68 and 69 symbol combinations are added in addition to the symbol combinations 1 to 67 (see FIGS. 7 to 9) of the present embodiment.

  The 68 symbol combinations are “blank-sheep-blank”. The condition device corresponding to this symbol combination is a winning 18, the number of payouts is one, and functions as a falling combination when the symbol combinations are aligned. Since there is only one left reel blank, middle reel sheep, and right reel blank, each reel has a stop button, even if the winning device 18 is selected as a condition device that can stop display. Depending on the stop position for operating, winning 18 may not be won. Specifically, if the left reel is operated at the 10th to 14th position in the upper stage and the left stop button is operated, the blank is stopped, and the middle reel is operated at the 19th or 3rd position in the middle stage as the sheep is operated by operating the middle stop button. If the right stop button is operated when the right reel is in the lower row of No. 3-7, the blank stops and the winning 18 is won. When any one of the stop buttons is operated at a position other than the above position, the winning prize 18 is not won. The symbol combination of 69 is bell-replay A-replay A. The condition device corresponding to this symbol combination is re-game 06, which functions as a re-game player, and can shift (promote) to “RT1” by displaying the stop.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a list of condition devices in the first modification from the present embodiment. Note that only the winning numbers 28 to 31 are different from the condition device of the present embodiment (see FIG. 10). Below, the winning numbers 28-31 which are different from the condition apparatus of this embodiment are demonstrated.

  For the winning number 28, the bonus winning information is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is 18, the production group number is 12, the outgoing group number is 14, and the condition device (name) is winning-J. As described above, the role is a fallen combination, and the condition device is a prize 18. As for the winning number 29, the bonus winning information is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is 19, the production group number is 13, the outgoing group number is 15, and the condition device (name) is replaying. -E1, the role is a 3 choice (left) replay role of RT promotion, and the condition device is replay 04, 06 (the replay 06 is stopped and displayed by setting the left reel to the first stop) Become). For the winning number 30, the bonus winning information is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is 20, the production group number is 13, the outgoing group number is 15, and the condition device (name) is replaying. -E2, the role is a 3 choice (medium) replay role of RT promotion, and the condition device is replay 01, 04, 06 (replay 06 is stopped and displayed by setting the middle reel to the first stop) Will be.) As for the winning number 31, the bonus winning information is 0, the winning / replaying winning information is 21, the production group number is 13, the outgoing group number is 15, and the condition device (name) is replaying. -E3, the role is a 3 choice (right) replay role of RT promotion, and the condition devices are replays 01, 02, 04, 06 (replay 06 is stopped by making the right reel the first stop) Will be displayed).

  Next, FIG. 57 shows a winning number (condition device number, also called a winning combination) and a bonus (also referred to as a BB, a BB winning) relating to a small combination and a replaying combination in the present embodiment in the first modification from the present embodiment. Is a list showing lottery probabilities (also referred to as winning rates) determined by the role lottery means. In the figure, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  With respect to the lottery probability (see FIG. 11) of the present embodiment, the difference is that winning numbers 28 to 31 are added and “RT3” is added. Below, the point different from the lottery probability of this embodiment is demonstrated.

  In “RT3”, the number of replays D1 to D3 is 1000, in “RT1”, the number of replays D1 to D3 is 10,000, and the winning probabilities of the replays D1 to D3 in “RT3” are It is defined lower than “RT1”. In the re-games -E1 to E3, the number of places in "RT0" is 1, not specified in "RT1", and the number of places in "RT2" is 100. As described above, the replays -E1 to E3 are easy to win only at “RT3”. In addition, when the re-games -E1 to E3 are won at "RT2" and the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the RT state will not shift, but the player who has recognized that the RT state does not shift You will be confident that you will win the bonus.

  Note that “RT3” is an RT state that shifts after the operation of BB (1 type BB-B) with setting difference is completed (see FIG. 60). On the other hand, BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) shifts to “RT1” after the operation of BB without setting difference is completed, as in this embodiment. In this way, by changing the game state to be transferred after the operation is completed, between the BB with setting difference and the BB without setting difference, different processing regarding the AT can be executed depending on the type of BB. For example, immediately after the operation of the BB without setting difference, the state shifts to the “AT state”, but after the operation of the BB with setting difference, the state temporarily shifts to “RT3” and “AT ready state” The replay 06 is configured to shift to the “AT state” when stopped.

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart according to the game number addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment (see FIG. 20) are Step 1534 (Modification 1), Step 1535 (Modification 1) and Step 1536 (Modification 1), that is, the state related to AT in Step 1502 is the advantageous BB state. Alternatively, in the case of the AT preparation state, in Step 1534 (Modification 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT is the advantageous BB state. In the case of Yes in Step 1534 (Modification 1), in Step 1535 (Modification 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is executing BB as the first type BB-A or the first type BB-C (no setting difference BB). ). If YES in step 1535 (change 1), the flow advances to step 1512. On the other hand, if No in Step 1534 (Modification 1) or Step 1535 (Modification 1), in Step 1536 (Modification 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M indicates that the game group number related to the game is the output related to the extra role in preparation. It is determined whether it is a ball group number. Here, in the present example, the additional role during AT is replay-B, replay-C, replay-E1 to E3, and winning-D. In the case of Yes in Step 1536 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 1514. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1536 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 1518. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the state relating to the AT is the “advantageous BB state”, if the BB being executed is the BB with no setting difference, the AT is being executed while the BB is being executed. While the addition of the number of games can be executed, when the BB being executed is a BB with a setting difference, the addition of the number of AT games is not executed during the execution of the BB.

  In the winning game number lottery table shown in FIG. 58, re-games -E1 to E3 (outing group number 15) are added. When the random value is included in 0 to 299, 30 games are determined as the AT additional game number. When the random number value is included in 300 to 989, 50 games are determined as the AT additional game number. When the random number value is included in 990 to 1023, 300 games are determined as the AT additional game number. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the push order navigation occurs, the setting state BB is won, and thereafter, in the RT state “RT3” in which the transition is made after the setting difference BB ends. Re-games that are easy to win re-games-E1-E3 will be won, and if the re-game 06 is stopped and displayed by operating the stop button in the correct push order, the number of AT games will be added With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of AT games when the BB with a setting difference is won.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart (third sheet) relating to the AT state transition control process in step 1400 of FIG. 21 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1444-1 (variant 1) to step 1444-4 (variant 1), that is, if the state related to the current AT is not the in-AT state in step 1430, in step 1432 If the condition device related to the game is not a special transition role (in this example, watermelon B), if the special state transition lottery is not won in step 1434, the AT counter value is 1 (AT final) in step 1436 Is not a game), or after the processing of step 1435, step 1439, and step 1443, in step 1444-1 (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the game is the final game in the advantageous BB state. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1 (variant 1), in step 1444-1 (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M is executing BB is the first type BB-B (BB with setting difference). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1444-2 (change 1), in step 1444-3 (change 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the state related to the AT after the next game to "AT ready state" (push order navigation occurs. When the BB with a setting difference is selected in the state related to the AT to be performed, the state is determined after the end of the BB (the state related to the AT to be transferred after the end of the BB to be in the advantageous BB state), and the process proceeds to Step 1445. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1444-2 (Modification 1), in other words, in the case of the first type BB-A or C, in Step 1444-4 (Modification 1), the CPUC100 of the main control board M performs the next game or later. The state related to the AT is determined as “AT state”, and the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the state relating to the AT that shifts after the “advantageous BB state” ends may differ depending on whether the BB is a setting difference BB or a setting difference BB. It is configured as follows.

  Next, FIG. 60 is an RT state transition diagram in the first modification from the present embodiment. In the first modification from the present embodiment, there are six RT states “RT0” to “RT3” and “1 type BB-A, B, C”, and the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure are as follows. When the condition is satisfied, the RT state shifts. The difference from this embodiment is that “RT3” exists.

  When the RT state is “RT0”, “RT1”, or “RT3”, the BB role is won and the BB role is not won in the selected game (the condition device relating to Type 1 BB-A to C operates) ) And the RT state shifts to “RT2”. Further, when “1 type BB-A” or “1 type BB-C (no setting BB)” is operated in “RT2”, the process shifts to “1 type BB-A, C”. On the other hand, when 1 type BB-B (BB with setting) is activated at “RT2”, the process shifts to “1 type BB-B”.

  Further, when the BB related to “Type 1 BB-B” is completed (the operation of Type 1 BB-B is completed), the process proceeds to “RT3”. When the RT state is “RT3” and the replay 04 symbol is displayed, the process shifts to “RT0”. When the RT state is “RT3” and the replay 06 symbol is displayed, the process shifts to “RT1”.

  When the RT state is “RT1” or “RT3”, when the winning prize 18 which is a falling combination is displayed in a stopped state, the process shifts to “RT0”.

  If the state related to the AT is “low probability state”, the BB is won, and when the BB is ended, the RT state shifts to “RT1” which is highly profitable for the player. The state is a state in which no push order navigation occurs, so when “Replay-D1 to D3” is won, the wrong answer push order (the first stop is three choices: left button, middle button, right button, 1 of 3 choices is correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and 2 of 3 choices are incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped)) By stopping, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is shifted to “RT0”. In addition, when the state related to AT is “high probability state”, “AT in-progress state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, BB is won, and when BB ends, RT state Will shift to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state where push navigation occurs, and even when “Regame-D1 to D3” is won, Since it navigates the order of pushing correct answers that are not stopped, “RT1” can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 61 is an AT state transition diagram in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. In this embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state” ”,“ Advantageous BB inside game ”,“ Advantageous BB state ”, and“ AT ready state ”, there are states related to 10 ATs. By satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure, the state relating to ATs Will be migrated. Note that, unlike the AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment, there is no “restoration effect state”. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as a game section, three states relating to ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal section”, “high probability state”, “AT in progress” The states related to the seven ATs are set to “advantaged section”: “state”, “specialized sign state”, “addition specialized state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “AT ready state” The In other words, even if the states related to the six ATs that are “advantageous sections” are transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise. In addition, a “standby section” that is different from the “advantage section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, in the case of a game where AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, If “BB + Cherry” with a duplicate of cherry and cherries is won, and the AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins is set as “standby section”. May be. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether the player is present or not can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  In addition, when the BB with the setting difference (1 type BB-B) is won in the “AT state”, the BB with the setting difference is activated, and then the “advantageous BB state” is finished, “RT3” and “AT ready” Transition to "state". If any of the re-games -E1 to E3 is won in the "AT ready state" and the promoted re-game (re-game 06) is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the "AT state". As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, the transition of the RT state is different after the end of the BB with the setting difference and after the end of the BB without the setting difference.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of one command processing related to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. 36 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 3000 (modified 1), step 3300 (modified 1), step 3350 (modified 1), and step 3400 (modified 1), that is, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 2252. Is the start lever operation timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the start lever operation-related effect determination process in step 3000 (change 1). If the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the first reel stop acceptance timing in Step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the first cylinder stop-time fall suggestion display process in Step 3300 (Modification 1). To do. If the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the second reel stop acceptance timing in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the second cylinder stop fall suggestion display process in step 3350 (Modification 1). To do. If the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the third reel stop acceptance timing at step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S at the third reel stop stop time AT preparation effect determination process at step 3400 (variant 1). Execute.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the start lever operation effect related determination process according to the subroutine of step 3000 (modified 1) in FIG. 62 (modified 1) in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3019, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to the AT of the game is a state in which push order navigation is executed. Here, the states related to the AT with push order navigation are “AT during state”, “specialization precursor state”, “addition specialization state”, and “AT precursor state”. In the case of Yes in step 3019, in step 3020, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a fallen combination (winning-J, which is a condition device that can win-stop 18). judge. In the case of Yes in step 3020, in step 3021 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state related to AT of the game is “AT ready state”. In the case of Yes in Step 3021, in Step 3250 (Modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a lever operation time AT preparation effect determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2300). . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3019, in step 3023, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state relating to AT of the game is the advantageous BB state. In the case of Yes in step 3023, in step 3024, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the setting difference BB (1 type BB-B) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3024, in step 3025, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game is the first game in BB. In the case of Yes in step 3025, in step 3026, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the effect to be executed in the game is a treasure chest acquisition effect (the number of AT games added in the RT state that shifts after the end of the BB is executed). To the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3023, step 3024, step 3025, and step 3021, in step 3027, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes to the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. Based on this, a notice effect and a stay stage are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 3020, in Step 3022, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts the RT state to an unfavorable state when the effect to be executed in the game is fallen avoidance suggestion display (when the winning prize 18 is stopped and displayed). Display to notify that it is to be performed), and the next process (the process of step 2300) is entered.

  The treasure box acquisition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of AT games will be added in the subsequent games, but it is regenerated when the player ignores the push order navigation at “RT3” after the end of the BB. Since the game 04 may be stopped and displayed as “RT0”, in the treasure chest acquisition effect, it is preferable not to notify that a specific number of AT games will be added, such as “Addition of XX game!”. is there.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of the effect determination processing during AT operation during lever operation according to the subroutine of Step 3250 (Modified 1) in FIG. 63 (Modified 1) in Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is the re-game E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game as a treasure box opening effect (effect that notifies that the number of AT games is added), and the next processing The process proceeds to (Step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3252, in step 3256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs an effect related to the game (the effect in the “AT preparation state” is appropriately executed) based on the condition device related to the game. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of the first case-stop fall indication display process according to the subroutine of Step 3300 (Modification 1) of FIG. 62 (Modification 1) in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a fall avoidance suggestion display is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the falling combination can be stopped and displayed when the reel that is the first stop is stopped. For example, when the first stop is the left reel, it is determined whether or not the blank constituting the winning line 18 is stopped and displayed on the upper row corresponding to the active line (when the first stop is the middle reel). It is determined whether sheep are stopped and displayed in the middle row, or blanks are stopped and displayed in the lower row when the first stop is the right reel). In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M continues to display the fall avoidance suggestion display and shifts to the next process (process in step 2500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3304, in step 3308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M erases the fall avoidance suggestion display and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). Even in the case of No in step 3302, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500). In this way, when the reel that is the first stop is stopped, if there is no possibility that the falling combination will be stopped, the fall avoidance suggestion display is erased without waiting for the end of the game. .

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flow chart of the second cylinder stop fall suggestion display process according to the subroutine of Step 3350 (Modification 1) of FIG. 62 (Modification 1) in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the fall avoidance suggestion display is being displayed. In the case of Yes in step 3352, in step 3304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the falling combination can be stopped and displayed when the reel that is the second stop is stopped. For example, when the rotating reel is the left reel, it is determined whether or not the winning 18 is stopped and displayed by displaying the blank constituting the winning 18 as the third stop on the upper line corresponding to the active line. (If the rotating reel is the middle reel, the sheep is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and the winning prize 18 is stopped or displayed. If the rotating reel is the right reel, the blank is stopped and displayed in the lower stage. It is determined whether or not the winning prize 18 is stopped and displayed). In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the CPUSC of the sub control board S continues to display the fall avoidance suggestion display and shifts to the next process (process of step 2550). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3354, in step 3358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S erases the fall avoidance suggestion display and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2550). In addition, also in the case of No in step 3352, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2550). In this way, when the reel that is the second stop is stopped, if there is no possibility that the falling combination will be stopped thereafter, the fall avoidance suggestion display is erased without waiting for the end of the game. . As described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when a winning combination that can be displayed in a stopped position by winning-J is won, a fall avoidance suggestion display can be displayed, and the fall avoidance display is displayed. The displayed game is configured to delete the fall avoidance suggestion display when it becomes definite that the fall combination does not stop display at the time of the first stop or the second stop.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the third-at-arm stop AT preparation effect determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3400 (Modified 1) in FIG. 62 (Modified 1) in Modified Example 1 of the present embodiment. . First, in step 3402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device relating to the game is the re-game D1 to D3. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the replay 04 has been stopped. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the treasure box loss effect (the effect of notifying that the promoted re-game is difficult to stop and display and transition to the RT state ("RT0")). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3402, in step 3410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is the replay E1 to E3. In the case of Yes in step 3410, in step 3412, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the replay 06 has been stopped. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds the treasure chest opening effect (the replay 06 is stopped in the game where the replays -E1 to E3 are won, and the number of AT games is increased. The effect of notifying that it has been executed) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3412, in other words, when replay 04 is stopped and displayed, in step 3416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the treasure chest explosion effect (regames −E1 to E3 has won the AT game. The number is added, but the RT state falls (the effect of notifying that “RT0” is shifted)) is executed, and the next process (the process of step 2600) is performed. In the case of No in step 3404 or step 3410, in step 3408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S appropriately executes an effect based on the stop display result, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 68 is a BB winning effect image diagram with a setting difference in Modification 1 from the present embodiment.

  First, an effect indicating that a treasure chest has been acquired is executed as a BB start effect with a setting difference due to the start of BB with a setting difference (upper left in FIG. 68). Here, the characters “BB start !!” and “Treasure GET !!” and an image showing a treasure box are displayed.

  Next, when the BB related to the setting difference BB ends, the RT state becomes “RT3”, and the re-game-E1 is won at “RT3” to execute the treasure chest opening effect (FIG. 68). (In the upper row). Here, an image in which a sword appears from the treasure box is displayed. Further, in this example, an image for navigating the left reel is also displayed as the first stop.

  Furthermore, when the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the replay 06 is stopped and displayed by operating according to the image for navigating the left reel as the first stop, the treasure chest opening addition effect is executed (FIG. 68, top right). Here, an image indicating that 50 AT games have been added is displayed. Thereafter, when the replay 06 is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to “AT state” and “RT1”. By performing the operation according to the navigation, it is possible to shift to “RT1” which is advantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, by operating without following the image for navigating the left reel as the first stop, when other than the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the treasure chest explosion effect is executed. (Right in the middle of FIG. 68). Here, an image of the treasure chest exploding is displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to “AT state” and “RT0”. By performing an operation that does not follow the navigation, the number of AT games is increased, but the RT state shifts to “RT0” which is more disadvantageous to the player than “RT1”.

  Furthermore, in “AT ready state” and “RT3”, if the replays D1 to D3 are won and the replay 04 is stopped before the replay 06 is stopped, the treasure box lost effect is generated. (In the lower part of FIG. 68). Here, an image in which the treasure chest disappears is displayed. As described above, when the game is proceeding according to the push order navigation, the replay 06 is stopped and displayed in the game selected as the replay-E1 to E3, the AT game number is added, and the treasure chest is added. An effect will be executed, but if the replay 04 stops and does not follow the push order navigation even though the number of AT games is scheduled to be added, the treasure box lost effect is executed. Then, it is configured to notify that the subsequent AT game number addition is not executed.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, there is a setting difference that becomes an “advantageous BB state”. During the execution of the BB related to the BB role, the lottery regarding the AT (particularly, the AT additional lottery) Is configured not to be executed, but is configured to shift to “RT3” after the end of BB with setting difference, and promoted replay that can be stopped and displayed when winning replays E1 to E3 that are easy to win at “RT3” When the game replay 06 is stopped and displayed, an additional AT game number is executed, so that if the game progresses according to the push order navigation, there is a setting difference that becomes an “advantageous BB state”. Yes = A gameability that the number of AT games is added by promotion replay can be realized, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the first modification from the present embodiment, during the execution of the BB without setting difference, the number of AT games is increased by winning a prize-H or a prize-I by winning a prize-H or a prize-I. If the winning game is won, the number of AT added games is displayed when the stop button that is the third stop of the selected game is operated, in other words, at a timing later than the timing at which the AT game number is decided to be added. Thus, an effect relating to the addition of the number of AT games is executed. On the other hand, while the BB with setting difference is being executed, the number of AT games is not added, and a treasure box acquisition effect is executed as an effect related to the addition of the AT game number. In addition, in the “AT ready state” that shifts after the end of the BB with no setting difference, the game is won for the additional number of AT games by winning the re-game-E. However, the AT game number is determined to be added at a later timing. The effect related to the addition of the number of AT games is an effect that the player recognizes for the first time that the addition of the number of AT games is executed or the addition of the number of AT games is executed.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the BB start effect is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation to shift to the “AT state” after the end of the BB, but the effect mode that can be executed as the BB start effect is the present embodiment. It is not limited to those. Therefore, the execution mode of the BB start effect different from that of the present embodiment is referred to as a second modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the third torso stop effect related determination process according to the subroutine of Step 3200 of FIG. 38 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, in step 3212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination with a setting difference has won. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the winning BB combination with a setting difference is a BB combination won during non-AT. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the set value suggestion effect determination table, and based on the set value, the BB start effect (effect executed by winning the BB role) Is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). If No in step 3214 (that is, during AT), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S in step 3218 gives a BB start effect as a blessing effect (the fact that it was won during the AT and the AT is added during the BB and the lottery is not executed). The effect is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3212, in step 3220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the BB combination won during the non-AT. In the case of Yes in step 3220, in step 3222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes the BB start effect as an AT winning effect (effect that informs that an AT lottery can be executed during BB), and executes it. The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600). On the other hand, if No in step 3220 (that is, during AT), in step 3224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the BB start effect is added to the number of games and that the lottery can be executed with the AT added during BB. To the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a configuration diagram of the set value suggestion effect determination table, and exemplifies the number distribution according to which effect is executed as the BB start effect for each set value. The set value suggestion effect determination table is a table defined in order to be able to suggest the set value to the player according to the content of the effect (BB start effect) executed when the bonus is started. This is a table in which the probability (distribution) is defined for each content of the production.

  In the case of setting 1, there are four types of production contents: sheep, lion, hero and enemy character. The winning probability for the sheep is 50/256, the winning probability for the lion is 60/256, the winning probability for the main character is 70/256, and the winning probability for the enemy character is 76/256. By defining in this way, in the case of setting 1, the possibility of being executed in the order of sheep, lion, hero and enemy character increases.

  In the case of setting 2 as well, there are four types of effects: sheep, lion, hero and enemy character. The winning probability for the sheep is 55/256, the winning probability for the lion is 65/256, the winning probability for the hero is 65/256, and the winning probability for the enemy character is 71/256. In the case of setting 2, the possibility of being executed in the order of sheep, lion, hero, and enemy character increases. In particular, in the case of setting 2, the possibility that the lion and the hero are executed is equal.

  Even in the case of setting 3, there are four types of production contents: sheep, lion, hero, and enemy character. The winning probability for the sheep is 60/256, the winning probability for the lion is 68/256, the winning probability for the main character is 60/256, and the winning probability for the enemy character is 68/256. In the case of setting 3, the possibility of being executed in the order of sheep, main character, lion, and enemy character increases. In particular, in the case of setting 3, the possibility that the sheep and the hero are executed is equal, and the possibility that the lion and the enemy character are executed is equal.

  Even in the case of setting 4, there are four types of effects: sheep, lion, hero and enemy character. The winning probability for the sheep is 65/256, the winning probability for the lion is 73/256, the winning probability for the hero is 55/256, and the winning probability for the enemy character is 63/256. By defining in this way, in the case of setting 4, the possibility of being executed in the order of the main character, enemy character, sheep, and lion increases.

  Even in the case of setting 5, there are four types of production contents: sheep, lion, hero and enemy character. The winning probability for the sheep is 70/256, the winning probability for the lion is 80/256, the winning probability for the hero is 50/256, and the winning probability for the enemy character is 56/256. By defining in this way, in the case of setting 5, the possibility of being executed in the order of the main character, enemy character, sheep, and lion increases.

  In the case of setting 6, there are five types of production contents including aliens in addition to sheep, lions, heroes and enemy characters. Winning probability for sheep is 80/256, winning probability for lion is 90/256, winning probability for hero is 40/256, winning probability for enemy characters is 44/256, space The winning probability for a person is 2/256.

  Thus, the expectation level with the high setting value when executed as the BB start effect is in the order of “enemy character → hero → lion → sheep” in the order of low expectation, and only the setting 6 displays the aliens. Configured to get. With this configuration, when an alien is displayed as the BB start effect, setting 6 is definitive.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, when the BB with no setting difference selected during the non-AT is executed, the state related to the AT after the BB ends. Therefore, it is easy for the player to feel unsatisfactory because there is little benefit in spite of having won the BB. Therefore, by executing an effect that suggests a set value as a BB start effect related to a BB with no setting difference won during non-AT, the player is unlikely to feel lost even if any BB is won in any state. It can be a user-friendly gaming machine.

  The production suggesting the set value may be configured to be executed at a timing other than the time when the BB role is won. ) At the end of the AT, it may be configured to execute the period from the announcement of the BB winning to the BB winning combination.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
In the modified example 2 from the present embodiment, an effect suggesting a set value can be executed as a BB start effect. However, the execution timing and effect of such an effect are the same as those of the modified example 2 from the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to the aspect, and the execution mode of the effect suggesting a setting value different from the second modification from the present embodiment is a third modification from the present embodiment. Hereinafter, from the second modification from the present embodiment. Only the changes will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. 16 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The change from the second modification from the present embodiment is Step 3700 (Modification 3), that is, after executing the game number addition execution process in Step 1500, or in Step 1259, the state related to the current AT is If it is not in the state where the AT can be randomly selected (“AT state”, “Additional special state”, “Specialization precursor state”, “Advantageous BB state”), the main control board M in Step 3700 (Variation 3) CPUMC executes a freeze lottery execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1400.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the freeze lottery execution process according to the subroutine of Step 3700 (Modification 3) in FIG. 70 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. This flowchart shows the process for determining the execution of a specific freeze effect among the freeze effects, and the freeze effect is not only the effect shown in the figure, but is shown as an example of the freeze effect to the last. ing.

  First, in step 3702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section of the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3702, in step 3704, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a common bell. Note that the common bell in this example is a condition device in which a lottery regarding the AT is not executed and the winning rate can be different depending on the set value. In the case of Yes in step 3704, in step 3706, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the setting-specific freeze execution lottery table, executes the specific freeze execution lottery based on the set value, and proceeds to the processing of step 3708. Next, in step 3708, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a specific freeze execution lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3708, in step 3710, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a freeze execution flag (a flag for executing a freeze effect when turned on). Next, in step 3712, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a specific freeze execution command (command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3702, step 3704, or step 3708, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  The setting-specific freeze execution lottery table shown on the right side of FIG. 71 is a table showing a winning probability that a freeze can be executed corresponding to each set value. The setting-specific freeze execution lottery table is a table that is referred to in the process of step 3706 in FIG.

  The winning probability when the setting value is set to setting 1 is 10/100, the winning probability when the setting value is set to setting 2 is 12/100, and the setting value is set to setting 3 The winning probability when the setting value is set to setting 4 is 16/100, and the winning probability when the setting value is set to setting 5 is 18/100. When the setting value is set to setting 6, the winning probability is 20/100.

  By determining the winning probability in this way, it is determined so that the freeze effect is easily executed as the set value increases. Further, both the execution probability of the freeze effect when the common bell is won and the winning rate of the common bell are configured to increase as the set value increases. The player can estimate the set value based on the tendency that the freeze effect is executed. In particular, according to the determination processing in step 3702, the freeze effect is executed when the game section is the “normal section”. By doing so, it is possible to provide information on setting values desired by the player by directing, and even if the game section is a “normal section”, the game is made monotonous with interest in the game. Can be prevented. In this example, the freeze effect can be generated when the common bell is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the freeze effect may be generated when another condition device is selected.

  In the third modification from the present embodiment, the freeze effect executed only in the “normal section” is illustrated as the specific freeze effect, but the execution mode of the freeze effect is not limited to this, A freeze effect different from the freeze effect may be configured to be executed in the “advantageous section”, or a specific freeze effect may be executed in the “advantageous section”. You may comprise so that an "advantageous section" may be performed more easily (the probability of being performed is higher) than the game area ("normal area") other than a section. That is, a plurality of types of freeze effects may be executed as freeze effects, a predetermined freeze effect may be executed in a plurality of types of game sections, or a plurality of predetermined freeze effects may be performed. The execution probabilities (for a predetermined freeze effect) may be different for each game section when configured to be executed in a type of game section. Further, when the predetermined freeze effect is configured to be executed in a state related to a plurality of types of ATs, the execution probabilities (for the predetermined freeze effect) for each state related to the AT may be made different. When configured to be executed in a plurality of types of RT states, the execution probabilities (for predetermined freeze effects) for each RT state may be different. In addition, the execution mode of the freeze effect may be an effect mode (sometimes referred to as a delay) that freezes for 0.2 seconds after the minimum time at which the reels can start to rotate, or a freeze for 10 seconds (freeze for 3 seconds). Then, the reel may vibrate little by little or rotate in the reverse direction).

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of Step 1550 in FIG. 70 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1568 (Modification 3) to Step 1574 (Modification 3). That is, in Step 1568 (Modification 3), the CPU MC of the main control board M has the freeze execution flag turned on. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 1568, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the freeze execution flag in Step 1570 (Modification 3). Next, in Step 1572 (Variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M starts by setting the freeze execution time (2 seconds in this example) to the freeze execution timer FZt (subtraction timer). The process proceeds to Change 3). Next, in Step 1574 (Variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer FZt is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1552). On the other hand, also in the case of No in Step 1568 (Modification 3), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1552). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1574 (Variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process.

  By configuring as described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the freeze effect can be executed by winning the common bell, which is a conditional device that does not execute the lottery regarding AT in the “normal section”. Configured. With such a configuration, even in the “normal section” where the advantageous section indicator YH is not lit and the expectation level during AT is relatively low, the set value is set according to the frequency of occurrence of the freeze effect. Thus, the game can be progressed without feeling tired in the game in the “normal section”.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the game section is configured to have two game sections of “advantage section” and “normal section”, but the configuration related to the game section is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment as the configuration of the game section is set as the second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the second embodiment, cherry A and cherry B are included as small roles. Cherry A is a small role whose winning probability may differ depending on a set value, and the winning number that can be won by Cherry A. As “Cherry A” that does not overlap with the BB role, and “Cherry A + 1 type BB-B” that overlaps with the BB role. Cherry A may be referred to as a rare role with a setting difference. Cherry B is a small role whose winning probability does not differ depending on the set value, and “Cherry B” that does not overlap with the BB role and “BB” that overlaps with the BB role are the winning winning numbers that the cherry B can win. “Cherry B + 1 species BB-A” and “Cherry B + 1 species BB-C”. Further, when Cherry B is won, a high probability state transition lottery can be executed. Cherry B may be referred to as a rare combination with no setting difference.

  First, FIG. 73 is an AT state transition diagram in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, “standby BB internal game”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization” There are 10 AT states related to the “predictor state”, “addition-specific state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, and “advantageous BB state”, and the AT is satisfied by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. The state regarding will shift. For example, if the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the “specialized sign state”. In addition, when 10 games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization sign state”, the transition is made to the “specialized state of addition”. In addition, as the game section, the states related to three ATs of “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, and “normal BB state” are set as “normal interval”, and “standby BB internal game” is “ 6 ATs set to “waiting section”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialized precursor state”, “addition special state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, “advantageous BB state” Is set to “advantageous section”. In other words, even if the states related to the six ATs that are “advantageous sections” are transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have elapsed without being set as “normal sections”, the “advantageous sections” are forcibly terminated. Set to “Normal section”. Also, when the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed in the “AT state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, which is a notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, However, the gaming state is maintained. Thus, in the second embodiment, a “standby section” is newly provided as a game section.

  In the “low probability state”, the game shifts to “standby BB internal game” in 1/5 when 1 type BB-C is won. When “Type 1 BB-C” is activated in “Standby BB Inside Game”, the state shifts to “Advantageous BB State”. Also, in the “low probability state”, when 1 type BB-A is won, the game shifts to “advantageous BB inside game” in 1/5. In this way, when the BB with no setting difference is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery winning at 1/5 is won, the BB role involved in winning the AT lottery is 1 type BB-A Or a type BB-C, the state related to the AT to be transferred and the set game section are different.

  It should be noted that the state related to the AT is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”, and the AT lottery. May be configured to shift to the “predictor state” by winning and then to “AT state” after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition device may be If the AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “gasse sign state”, and after 16 to 32 games, the state shifts to the “low probability state” or “high probability state” You may comprise. In addition, as a “standby section” that is different from an “advantageous section” and a “normal section” as a game section, for example, when the game is such that AT lottery is executed by winning “Cherry”, BB and cherry overlap. When “BB + Cherry” is won and AT lottery is won, the state inside the BB until “BB” of “BB + Cherry” wins may be set as “standby section”. In this way, by providing a “standby section”, when the BB is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is not won, the BB is won in the “low probability state”, and the AT In the period when the lottery is won and until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. Whether the player is present or not can be told to the player. Further, when the BB is elected in the “additional special state”, the “additional special state” may be resumed after the end of the BB. In such a case, during the BB, Execute the AT addition lottery that is different from the BB won in the “AT state” as the BB won in the “specialized state” (for example, win the AT extra lottery over the BB won in the “AT state”) The number of AT games may be increased and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when the BB is elected in the “specialization sign state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional special state” after the end of the BB. In such a configuration, during the BB, It may be configured such that the AT extra lottery is executed in the same manner as the BB won in the “extra specialization state”.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the game section transition control process according to the subroutine of Step 3500 of FIG. 18 in the second embodiment. First, in step 3535, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. In the case of Yes in step 3535, in step 3536, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the type 1 BB-A has been won in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3536, in step 3537, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as a “normal section”, and proceeds to the processing of step 3554.

  If NO in step 3536, in step 3538, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the type 1 BB-C has been won in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3538, in step 3539, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the “standby section”, and proceeds to the processing of step 3554. If NO in step 3538, in step 3540, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a determination based on the state relating to the AT determining the game section after the next game and the current game situation. Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3535, in step 3541, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 3541, in step 3542, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the BB operation has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 3542, in step 3543, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to the processing of step 3554. In the case of No in step 3542, in step 3544, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the “standby section”, and proceeds to the processing in step 3554.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3541, in step 3545, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is zero. If Yes in step 3545, the process proceeds to step 3546. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3545, in step 3549, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. If No in step 3549, the process proceeds to step 3546. Next, in step 3546, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT. Next, in step 3547, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as the normal section. Next, in step 3548, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH and proceeds to the processing in step 3554. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3549, in step 3552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an advantageous section, and proceeds to the processing of step 3554.

  Next, in step 3554, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a new “advantageous section” has been entered in the next game. In the case of Yes in step 3554, in step 3556, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (1500 in this example) to the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. Next, in step 3558, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In the case of No in step 3554, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1293).

  Next, FIG. 75 is a continuous effect execution image diagram in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 75 is a game effect execution image diagram on the main control board side in the rotary gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

  The first row in FIG. 75 shows the change in effect displayed on the effect display device S40 when the cherry B (rare role without setting difference) and 1 type BB-A (bonus without setting difference) are simultaneously won, It is an image figure which shows the change of lighting of the area display YH, and light extinction. In addition, it will be in the state which won the AT lottery by winning 1 type BB-A. In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to the “high probability state” by winning the cherry B in the “low probability state”.

  First, by simultaneously winning both Cherry B and Type 1 BB-A, an effect that lightning is displayed on the entire screen as a stage change effect is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. (The leftmost diagram of the first stage in FIG. 75).

  Next, a night stage that suggests a “high probability state” is set as a stay stage by executing the stage change effect, and an image of the hero walking is displayed on the effect display device S40, and an advantageous section indicator YH maintains the lighting state (second diagram from the left in the first stage in FIG. 75).

  Next, while the stay stage remains the night stage, it is notified that the main character has met the lion and won the bonus, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept on (the first stage in FIG. 75). The second figure from the right).

  Finally, by aligning the 1 type BB-A symbol combination, an image where the BB is started is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept on (FIG. 75). The rightmost figure in the first stage).

  The second row of FIG. 75 shows the change in the effect displayed on the effect display device S40 when the cherry B (rare role without setting difference) and 1 type BB-C (bonus without setting difference) are simultaneously won, It is an image figure which shows the change of lighting of the area display YH, and light extinction. In addition, it will be in the state which won the AT lottery by winning 1 type BB-C.

  Next, an image in which two characters are developing a battle is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept off (second from the left in the second row in FIG. 75). Figure).

  Next, the winning image of one character is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept off (second figure from the right in the second row in FIG. 75).

  Finally, by arranging the 1 type BB-C symbol combination, an image in which the BB is started is displayed on the effect display device S40, and at this point, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit (see FIG. The rightmost figure of the second stage of 75).

  In the case where Cherry B and 1 type BB-A are simultaneously selected and in the case where Cherry B and 1 type BB-C are simultaneously selected, the advantageous interval indicator is simultaneously displayed on Cherry B and 1 type BB-A. In the case of winning, when the cherry B and 1 type BB-A are won simultaneously, the lighting state is turned on, and the “normal section” (non-advantageous section) is changed to the “advantageous section”. On the other hand, when Cherry B and Type 1 BB-C are simultaneously selected, the advantageous section indicator remains in the off state when Cherry B and Type 1 BB-C are simultaneously selected, and Type 1 BB. When the symbol combinations of −C are aligned, the light-off state changes to the light-on state, and the “standby zone” (non-advantage zone) changes to the “advantage zone”.

  The third row of FIG. 75 shows the change in the effect displayed on the effect display device S40 when the winning lottery of “high probability state” is won by the winning of Cherry B (rare role without setting difference), and the advantageous section indicator. It is an image figure which shows the change of lighting of YH and light extinction. In addition, by winning the “high probability state” transition lottery, the high probability state is won, and the “low probability state” is shifted to the “high probability state”.

  First, as a result of winning Cherry B, an effect that lightning is displayed on the entire screen as a stage change effect is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is lit (FIG. 75). (Leftmost figure in the third stage).

  Next, a night stage that suggests a high probability state is set as a stay stage by executing the stage change effect, and an image in which the main character is walking is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is The lighting state is maintained (second diagram from the left in the third row in FIG. 75).

  Next, while the night stage suggesting a high probability state is set as the stay stage, an image in which the main character is walking is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept on ( FIG. 75 is the third diagram from the left in the third row).

  Next, while the night stage suggesting a high probability state is set as the stay stage, an image in which the main character is walking is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept on ( FIG. 75 is the fourth diagram from the left in the third row in FIG. 75). Since the bonus is not won, the effect related to the bonus win is not executed.

  The fourth row of FIG. 75 is an image diagram showing a change in effect displayed on the effect display device S40 by winning of Cherry A (rare role with setting difference) and a change in lighting and extinguishing of the advantageous section display YH. Note that when the cherry A is won, the “high probability state” transition lottery is not executed, and therefore the “low probability state” is maintained.

  First, winning of Cherry A displays an image in which two characters start a battle, and the advantageous section display YH is turned off (the leftmost figure in the fourth row in FIG. 75). .

  Next, an image in which two characters are developing a battle is displayed, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept off (second diagram from the left in the fourth row in FIG. 75).

  Next, an image in which the main character is defeated is displayed, and the advantageous section indicator YH is kept off (second diagram from the right in the fourth row in FIG. 75).

  Finally, as the main character was defeated, the day stage indicating "low probability state" is displayed as before the battle was started as the stay stage, and an image of the main character walking is displayed on the effect display device S40. At the same time, the advantageous section indicator YH is kept off (the rightmost diagram in the fourth stage of FIG. 75).

  In this way, when the winning lottery of “high probability state” is won by winning Cherry B, the stage change effect, which is the effect that is completed in one game, is executed, and when Cherry wins, the advantageous section is displayed. The device YH is turned on. In addition, when 1 type BB-C is won, a battle effect is executed and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off until the BB combination wins. Constructed in this way, even when winning, Cherry A, which is a small role that does not shift to the “high probability state”, is executed in combination with BB when winning Cherry A, In particular, you can have a sense of expectation. However, in the case of only the above configuration, if a stage change effect is executed when Cherry B is won, it becomes definite that Cherry B is not simultaneously won with the BB combination. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when 1 type BB-A (1 type BB-A winning simultaneously with Cherry B) is selected, stage change effect is executed, and the subsequent game (for example, Even if the winning section indicator is turned on in the winning game, the BB role is won by winning the BB role by notifying the player that the BB role is won by performing on the night stage after 3 games) In addition to having a sense of expectation for winning the role, if the winning section indicator is lit in the winning game, and then the winning of the BB is notified, It is possible to recognize that the player has won both of the AT lottery winnings, and the gaming machine can be more interesting. In the case of configuring the production mode as in the second embodiment, it is preferable to configure so that it is difficult to visually determine which of the cherry A and the cherry B has won (the player has visually confirmed). In this case, it is easy to recognize that the same cherry is won in both cases of winning Cherry A and Cherry B). The battle effect may be referred to as a bonus effect, and the stage change effect may be referred to as a notification state effect. In addition, an effect for notifying whether or not a bonus is won in one game may be executed as a bonus squeak effect. In addition, it may be configured to be able to win an AT with a rare role with no setting difference. In such a case, an AT lottery with a rare role with no setting difference and a rare role with no setting difference. The stage change effect may be executed in the game that has been won, and then the fact that the bonus is won may be notified.

  In this example, a battle effect that is executed over a plurality of games is executed as a bonus reward effect indicating whether or not a bonus is won, and a stage change effect that is completed in one game as an AT reward effect indicating whether or not an AT is selected. However, the execution mode of the production is not limited to that of the present example, and the bonus production effect may be completed in one game, or the AT production production is executed over a plurality of games. It may be a production. Further, in this example, it is configured to start executing the bonus squeaking effect in the bonus winning game, but in the bonus winning game, the bonus squeezing effect can be started from the next game onward without executing the bonus screaming effect. It may be configured. Similarly, the AT beat effect may be configured so that the AT beat effect can be started from the next game onward without performing the AT beat effect in the AT winning game (or the high probability state transition lottery winning game). . If it is newly determined that the “normal section” is changed to the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator is displayed in the newly determined game even if the bonus squealing effect or the AT squeezing effect is not started. YH is lit.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the AT lottery can be won by winning the BB with no setting difference in the low probability state, and at the time of winning the AT lottery And a case where a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect at the time of winning the BB role and a stage change effect is executed as an effect completed in one game. In such a configuration, when the BB combination when winning the AT lottery in the “low probability state” is 1 type BB-A, it becomes “advantageous zone”, and in the case of 1 type BB-C, “standby zone” If “1 type BB-A + Cherry B” is won in the “low probability state” and the AT lottery is won, the stage change effect will be executed and the next game won When the advantageous section indicator YH is lit and “Low Probability” wins “Type 1 BB-C + Cherry B” and wins an AT lottery, a battle effect is performed and Type 1 BB-C The advantageous section indicator YH is turned on after the winning BB combination is won. By configuring in such a manner, even if the advantageous section indicator YH is not lit during the battle performance, there is a possibility that either BB or AT lottery may be won. It can be set as the execution mode of the production which does not impair the player's expectation. In addition, even when a stage change effect is executed, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for winning the BB, and to create a highly entertaining gaming machine.

<Other changes>
In this example, the first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning the prize and the second BB combination in which the second BB having lower profit than the first BB is executed by winning the prize are executed. Further, the first BB combination and the second BB combination may be won in duplicate (providing a combination of “first BB + second BB”). In such a configuration, when “first BB + second BB” is won, the symbol combination (first BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the highly profitable first BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the first BB is finished, The symbol combination corresponding to 2BB (second BB combination) may be displayed in a stopped state (the second BB is won even during execution of the first BB). In addition, when “1BB + 2BB” is won, by executing the highly profitable 1BB first, for example, when the closing time of the game hall is approaching, “1BB + 2BB” is won. In such a case, the second BB with low profit is executed first, the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be terminated without executing the first BB with high profit. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning configuration of the second BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after being hidden (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In such a case, it may be configured such that the winning probability of replay is increased in the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Moreover, you may comprise so that the production | presentation which suggests 2nd BB winning possibility may be performed when it is made to hide (for example, "BB consecutive resort chance time!" Is displayed on production display device S40). . In such a configuration, if there is no case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB, it will be definitive that the production occurrence = the second BB is won, so only the first BB is won. Even after the operation of the first BB is finished, it is preferable that the production suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is executed (the production mode after the completion of the first BB is the same as described above. For example, “BB Renso Chance Time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even when only the first BB is won, and after the operation of the first BB is finished, the first BB is won again, and the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. May be. Further, once the winning of the second BB is notified, the winning of the first BB may be notified (for example, display of “BB consecutive resort chance time!” → display of “sorry” → “first” 1BB won! ”). Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the first BB operation is completed after the first winning operation is completed during the AT, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared, etc. However, the internal reduction in the number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. When the first BB and the second BB are selected and won, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small combination A are won simultaneously, the first BB is given priority to stop control.
(2) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, the small combination B is given priority to stop control.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for which stop control is given priority over the BB combination and a small combination for which stop control is given priority to the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small role A are both won, when the small role A wins, or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small role A (for example, at the first stop, When 2 stops), a notification corresponding to the small combination A (notification that the small combination A can win) is performed.
In other words, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is used to notify the first BB combination that is controlled to stop in preference to the small combination A. Thus, when the first BB combination cannot be won regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (the small combination A can be won), a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. Further, when the small combination A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform notification that is most advantageous to the player in accordance with various game situations that change in the middle of the game, as well as the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like. It is possible to prevent the winning combination from being inconsistent.
(4) When the first BB and the small combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the small combination B is performed during rotation of all reels.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have a display (7 segment etc.) which displays the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) by which it stopped and is controlled by the main control board M. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradiction effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) that is stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect that is highly likely to be output when the watermelon is won (for example, the lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and a configuration having the following characteristics may be used.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of stages by the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using an earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine) ).
(3) When a game is played using the earphone jack, even when the maximum volume is selected, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume that is not the maximum volume.

  Further, during the AT state or during BB execution, even when a game is played using an earphone jack, it may be configured such that a production sound is output from the gaming machine. Further, a volume for when the earphone jack is not used and a volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even when the earphone is removed, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared immediately (to the initial value). For example, when no operation is performed for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to an initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the sound volume for using the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord does not get entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever). ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-gamer can be varied between the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or more and the end of the BB when the BB is acquired at a specific number or less. It may be configured.
(2) You may have two or more RT states which transfer when RT state (for example, RT1) with the relatively high winning probability of a re-game player is complete | finished. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after “RT1” ends, or may be configured to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) The RT state is shifted when a predetermined winning combination is won. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond to the winning one-on-one, and the transition is made with a constant probability regardless of the condition device or the winning (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount 0th RT transition, duplicate winning combination of 0 sheets, and double winning combination of 0 sheets. That is, no matter which push order is stopped, no matter what position the stop operation is performed, no more than one winning combination is provided as a 0 winning combination, and the RT state shifts by winning the 0 winning combination. It may be configured to be able to obtain a double winning combination of 0 and 7 and a winning combination of 0 and A. It should be noted that, when the double winning combination of the 0 sheets is selected, it may be configured such that either the 0 sheet combination that shifts to RT or the 0 sheet combination that does not shift to RT is awarded according to the pressing order. It is also possible to make a winning combination by prioritizing the 0-sheet combination by winning the 0-sheet combination and the BB combination.

  In addition, as in this example, the push order of the push order bell is 6 choices ("Left → Middle → Right", "Left → Right → Middle", "Middle → Left → Right", "Middle → Right → Left", “Right → Left → Middle” and “Right → Middle → Left” (6 choices), and push order replay push order is 3 choices (1st stop is left, middle, right 3 choices) In this case, the push order display in the push order display device D270 is different from the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay. You may comprise so that a display and 3 choice push order navigation display may differ. As an example, the push order display relating to 6 choices is “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” Is displayed as “= 6”, and the push order display for the three options is “= 7” when the first stop is on the left, and “= 8” when the first stop is in the middle. When the first stop is on the right, the display may be such as “= 9”.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows.
(1) It is configured so that the number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT in progress state”, “specialized sign state”, or “additional special state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games is 0 and the AT state is changed from the “AT state” to the “normal game state”, the AT lottery is won again within the specific game and the “AT state” is changed. While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and then transitions from the “AT state” to the “normal game state” and then again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state is shifted to the “AT state”, the previous AT digest game number is not taken over, and the number of AT digest games is newly counted from 0 games.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts to rotate, an indication prompting the reel to stop on the effect display device S40 (for example, “reel If you do not operate the stop button for a certain period of time after the reel starts rotating in a game where push order navigation has occurred, (2-1) Production The display areas of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 and the display prompting to stop the reel do not overlap, and (2-2) the display prompting to stop the reel is not displayed.
(3) When the power is turned “on → off → on” in a game where push order navigation occurs, the reel rotation speed becomes constant and before the stop button operation becomes valid. The push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing.
(4) A state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT are states related to an AT in which the push order navigation is generated in a game in which the common bell is won or the push order navigation may occur. The frequency with which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won differs between the state with respect to a certain AT and the state with respect to another AT that is a state with respect to the AT where push order navigation can occur.
(5) In the RT state (“RT1” in this example) where the winning probability of replay is the highest, the proportion of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the proportion of games in which push order navigation does not occur high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is ½ or more. With this configuration, the game can proceed without the player getting tired during the AT.
You may comprise as mentioned above.

  Here, the feature point about the above-mentioned game section is explained in full detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for shifting to the “advantageous section” can be executed except during the internal winning of BB and the execution of BB.

≪Standby section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the “standby state”, it becomes an “advantageous section” from the next game.

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, shifting from a “high probability state” to an “AT in-progress state” as an AT-related state), an AT game number addition lottery, or the like may be executed.
(5) During the “favorable section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) If the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the “advantageous section” is basically used unless the BB or push order navigation is executed at least once in the “advantageous section”. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. The “advantageous section” can be completed even if it is not executed.
(7) The advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is measured in all the games in the "favorable section" (for example, every game counter value is added even during execution of BB).

Here, the feature points related to the lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence / absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is not determined in the course of the number of games.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability depending on the set value is established, the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the “advantageous section” is executed, even if the set values are different, the lottery probabilities are the same.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high probability state”, and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT state”. Etc., there is no difference depending on the setting value).
(5) Setting to “advantageous section” When winning the lottery, the next game will be changed to “advantageous section” (setting to “advantageous section” in the BB role established in “normal section”. If a lottery is won, it can be set as a “standby section” in the next game).

Here, the characteristic points related to the performance change of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (the condition common to all the set values may be that a predetermined number of games have elapsed and a predetermined condition device is established) .
(2) When a condition device having different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed when the condition device is established. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(3) When the BB is won internally, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(4) During the execution of the BB, when the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB Is not executed. A lottery or the like is not executed in addition to the number of AT games.
(5) A lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” during the execution of the BB when the lottery probability of the BB combination that has triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value during the execution of the BB. Can be executed. A lottery or the like can be executed by adding the number of AT games.

  Moreover, you may apply the following structures to the rotary type game machine which concerns on this example. Moreover, the following structures may be applied independently and a some structure may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT which is an “advantageous section” but is harder to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous performance is composed of at least a continuous number of games equal to or greater than a predetermined number of G.
(3) There is a normal role that is not won at 100% for AT lottery and a special role that is won at 100% for AT lottery. In such a case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, the production is performed to notify that the AT lottery is won even during the continuous production (replace the continuous production).
(4) The more remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus winning, expectation level for AT lottery), and the remaining games with the number of highly secured obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous performance with a low expectation.
(5) The smaller the remaining number of highly secured obstacles, the higher the probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher expectation level (expectation level for bonus wins, expectation level for AT lottery wins).
(6) If the number of remaining high-impact games is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), a continuous production that is lost will not be executed, Can be executed. In other words, when the remaining number of high secured obstacles is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the effect of completing one game can be executed both in the case of a loss and in the case of success, Can only be executed if.
(7) If the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of effects differs between the case where the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and the case where the number is greater than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous effects, expectation of big hits for predetermined effects, etc.).
(9) In the case of a new transition to an “advantageous section” in the middle of a continuous production (for example, an effect of defeat) in a “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the “advantageous zone” transition game “When you turn around, there is a character and Stechen suggestion”, etc.). The rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which the production is rewritten during the continuous production (win).
(9-2) The stay stage is changed after the continuous performance is executed to the end. When the transition to the “advantageous section” is performed during the execution of the continuous performance, the proportion of notification that the transition is made on the sub-control board S side in the game, and the sub-game in the game when the continuous performance is not performed. The ratio of notifying that the control board S has shifted is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) The player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section”. For example, the selection can be made by operating the sub input button.
(2) First stage of stay stage A group: A lottery result indicating whether or not it will be an “advantageous section” is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game.
Stay stage A group 2: A lottery result indicating whether or not it becomes an “advantageous section” will be announced at the end of the game (or at the time of the next game bet (when the replay stop is displayed, the start lever is operated)).
(3) A stay stage is selected from the stay stage A group when it becomes a “normal section” from a state other than the “advantageous section” and stay stage A group. The stay stage is maintained when it becomes the “normal section” from the “advantageous section” and the stage other than the production A group.
(4) The AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator is off and stay stage A is different from the AT expectation degree when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than stay stage A group. For example, from the one with a low AT expectation level, “the advantageous section indicator is turned off and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section display is turned on and the stay stage A group → the advantageous section display is turned on and other than the stay stage A group”
(5) The stay stage transition (stay stage A group → stay stage B group) triggered by the effect (including the 1G completion effect and continuous effect) from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” The rate of occurrence differs from the rate at which the transition of the stay stage is triggered by the effect in the game from “advantageous section” to “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The higher the number of games for “Advantageous Zones” (the remaining number of high secured obstacles), the higher the degree of expectation (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The probability of selecting the stay stage is high, and the smaller the number of games guaranteed for the “favorable section” (the remaining number of games with high obstacles), the higher the expectation level (the expected level and the bonus won in the AT lottery) The probability of selecting a stay stage with a high expectation) is high.
(2) When the remaining security game in the “advantageous section” is less than or equal to a predetermined value (4 games or less), the smaller the number of remaining security games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If a stage with a high degree of expectation is selected in the situation where you are not staying at a high-expectation stage (expected degree for winning an AT lottery, expecting degree for winning a bonus) Expectation (winning for AT lottery) than when a stage with high expectation is selected in the situation where you are staying at a high stay stage (expectation for winning an AT lottery, expectation for winning a bonus) The expectation that is won and the expectation that the bonus is won) is high.

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If BB is won in the “Restorability Produce State”,
(1-1) The lottery may be executed with the AT added during BB or may not be executed.
(1-2) After completion of BB, the state may be shifted to “AT state” or may not be shifted.
(1-3) AT lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed.
(1-4) When shifting to the “AT state” after the end of BB, the number of AT remaining games may or may not be subtracted for one game in the “restorability effect state”.
(2) The AT addition lottery may be executed or not executed in the “restorability effect state”. If you run a lottery with AT,
(3) In the “Restorability Prompt State” state, if a reverse-pressed white 7-match replay or a forward-pressed black 7-match replay is won, an avoidance navigation occurs and the timing after executing the resurrection effect (success) Informs the number of additional games.
(4) If a winning combination that can be changed to “advantageous section” is won in “revival / prohibition effect state”, the advantageous section indicator is turned off at the start timing of the next game, while “revival / prohibition effect state” If a winning combination that can shift to the “advantageous section” is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery is not won, the advantageous section indicator can be lit at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification that is an advantageous section in the “Restorability Producing State” but is not on the AT lottery,
(5-1) Even if a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in “Restorability Prompt State” is selected, the number of AT games will not be increased, but a 1G reviving effect (success) will be executed. When a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) is won in ("AT state"), the number of AT games can be added.
(6) Bonus in the case where “Battle Effect 3G + Restoration Effect (Failure) 1G” is scheduled to be executed as an effect at the end of the AT, and when the resurrection effect (success) is executed by winning the bonus in the revival effect execution game There is no extra number of AT games, but there is an extra number of AT games during the bonus when the bonus effect is won in the battle production execution game (any of 3G) Can do. Moreover, the production | presentation tendency in a bonus may differ.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) In the case of having a gaming state A and a gaming state B as states relating to an AT that is an “advantageous section”
(1-1) Expected winning degree of the AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the number of AT games is more likely to be added in the gaming state A than in the gaming state B or the AT additional game) a lot).
(1-2) The number of extras that can be added when winning a combination X in the gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when winning a combination Y in the gaming state A.
(1-3) The number of extras that can be added when winning a combination X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning a combination Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) When the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), after the second stop to before the third stop (C). Make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the inconspicuous to the player.
(2) In the case of “Low Probability State” and “RT1” in which the AT has ended from the “AT in progress” state and the “RT1” state, the push order display device pushes when the winning combination is won. Although the forward navigation is displayed, the push navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (“???” is displayed).
(3) In a game in which a fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, when winning 18 (falling combination) is won at the third stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as the display mode after the second stop. .
(4) When the start lever is operated in a situation where the initial process related to the display of the effect display device is not completed when the power supply is restored from the power interruption, rather than the completion of the initial process related to the display of the effect display device Push order navigation is executed with the voice from the speaker (for example, “It is left!”) At the previous timing.
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to AT, which is highly profitable for the player, such as “specialized state of addition”, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is preferentially displayed when winning the fall combination.
(6) The “advantageous section” is maintained even if the faller wins a prize in the “advantageous section”.
(7) In a case where the falling combination is configured to be a push combination (determining whether or not to stop display depending on the push order), a winning combination (push order bell, etc.) that is not a falling combination is won and pushed. When navigation is performed and stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation, the display on the effect display device may be dimmed, but when the winning combination is a fallen combination, it is stopped in a pressing order different from the push order navigation. In such a case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or does not darken the display of the fall avoidance suggestion effect).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) When configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT ready state” after BB related to a setting difference BB (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) Win a winning combination with a high probability in “RT3” to win an AT lottery (100% winning or winning with a predetermined probability).
(1-2) Depending on the type of the BB combination, the RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (the combination for executing the addition lottery, addition) according to the combination that easily appears in any RT state The lottery winning probability and the number of AT extra games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → Promotion Replay A → RT3 (Replay probability is high), Bonus B → RT2 → Promotion Replay B → RT3, and it is added by Promotion Replay A and Promotion Replay B The winning rate or the average number of added games is different.
(1-4) When bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are included, the winning probabilities of promotion replay A and promotion replay B are RT1 and RT2. Is different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1 and bonus B → RT2 are set so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probabilities of promotion replay and fall replay differ between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) There is a setting difference. After the BB ends, the state shifts to a dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT ready state”), and then shifts to an “additional special state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) It has 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2, and after completion of 1 type BB-B1, it shifts to “RT3” and after 1 type BB-B2 ends, it shifts to “RT4” When configured as follows.
(1-1) “RT3” and “RT4” differ in the AT extra lottery execution mode (the role for executing the extra lottery, the extra lottery winning probability, and the number of AT extra games).
(1-2) The BB start effect relating to the type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect relating to the type 1 BB-B2 have different effect tendencies (the selection rate of the BB start effect having a high expectation is different).
(2) When the replay 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay 06 in the “AT ready state” and “RT3”, the process shifts to “RT4” and the treasure box loss effect is not executed. In “RT4”, a re-game player who is promoted to “RT3” is elected. In addition, when “RT4” is changed to “RT3”, the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if the re-games -E1 to E3 are subsequently won.
(3) It has a plurality of types of BB roles, and even if the BB role is won, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has won, and depending on the type of BB, The execution state of the AT addition lottery when the RT state is made different and the promoted regame player is won differs depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of BB (such as a gold treasure chest, a silver treasure chest, a copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) BB start effect related to the BB with a setting difference won during the AT and the proportion of the start effect related to the BB start effect related to the BB with no setting difference won during the AT, and a setting difference won during the non-AT. The ratio which becomes the same effect aspect by the BB start effect which concerns on BB, and the start effect which concerns on the BB without setting difference elected during non-AT differs.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when BB without setting difference is won in the “normal section” rather than the probability that the effect suggesting the setting value is selected when winning the BB with setting difference in the “favorable section” The probability that a production is selected is higher.
(2) In the BB won during the non-AT, a different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference, but in the BB selected during the AT, the same BB start effect is selected regardless of the setting difference.
(3) The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same in the BB with a setting difference won during the AT and the BB without the setting difference won during the AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during the non-AT and the non-AT The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same effect mode is different from the BB without setting difference.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) When “Winning without setting difference (Winning rate with different winning rate depending on setting value) + BB” is selected, “Advantageous section indicator lighting + effect B” that can be executed when winning with “No setting difference” is selected The probability of selecting “Advantageous section indicator off + production A” that can be executed at the time of winning “the role with setting difference (the winning rate varies depending on the set value)” is higher than the probability of { "At the time of the combination + BB" is an effect (for example, a battle effect) that praises the winning of the BB rather than an effect (for example, an effect that shifts to a stay stage where the user can stay in a high probability state). Is easier to implement}.
(2) When a predetermined role (for example, cherry) is won, the game is configured to shift to a high probability state with 100%, and the allocation of the number of high secured obstacles is “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G ", if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, otherwise the battle is won. In addition, the expectation of the length of the number of high-definition games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) varies depending on the opponent who won the battle. Further, in the case of the above example, an effect of encouraging continuation with high accuracy 20G is performed (an effect of encouraging whether the game is 20 games or 50 games, and if successful, it is determinative that it is 50 games). .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more easily performed in the “normal section” than in the “advantageous section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of a loss.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (1)
Has an effect display section that can display effects,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
As the gaming state set in the advantageous section, at least the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is configured not to end until a game corresponding to the number of guaranteed games is executed after entering the first gaming state.
It is possible to display a continuous effect which is an effect executed over a plurality of games on the effect display unit,
In the situation where the game state is the first gaming state, the game in which the number of games remaining until the game corresponding to the number of guaranteed games is executed is a predetermined number or more, the continuous production is configured to be able to start displaying,
In a situation where the game state is the first gaming state, in the game where the number of games remaining until the game for the number of guaranteed games is executed is less than the predetermined number, the display of the continuous effect is not started. It is a featured spinning machine.

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
Has an effect display section that can display effects,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
As the stage that can be displayed on the stage display unit, the stage includes at least a first stage and a second stage that has a different stage tendency than the first stage. Configured to be configured,
In the non-advantageous section, the first stage can be set, while the second stage is not set,
In the advantageous section, it is a rotating type gaming machine configured such that both the first effect stage and the second effect stage can be set.

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub-game unit that performs display control of the effect on the effect display unit,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
As the gaming state set in the advantageous section, at least the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is configured not to end until a game corresponding to the number of guaranteed games is executed after entering the first gaming state.
As the stage that can be displayed on the stage display unit, the stage includes at least a first stage and a second stage that has a different stage tendency than the first stage. Configured to be configured,
The case where the second stage is set rather than the case where the first stage is set is configured to have a higher expectation level that is a gaming state advantageous to the player,
In a situation where the number of remaining games until a game corresponding to the number of guaranteed games is executed in a situation where the first gaming state is set and the first stage is set, The second stage is configured to be newly set,
In a situation where the number of games remaining until the game for the number of guaranteed games is executed is less than a predetermined number in the situation in the first gaming state and the situation where the first performance stage is set, A rotating type gaming machine is configured such that the second stage is not newly set.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (4) is
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
As an information display part capable of displaying information, a first information display part and a second information display part are provided,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
The first information display unit is configured to display either the advantageous section or the non-favorable section.
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
In a situation where the notification state is controlled, at least a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the second information display unit. Configured to obtain
As an effect that can be displayed on the second information display unit, it has at least a continuation effect that suggests continuation of the advantageous section,
In the game capable of executing the continuation effect, it is configured to display the fact that it is the advantageous section on the first information display section regardless of whether or not the continuation effect is executed. Machine.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (5) is
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
As an information display part capable of displaying information, a first information display part and a second information display part are provided,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
The first information display unit is configured to display either the advantageous section or the non-favorable section.
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
In a situation where the notification state is controlled, at least a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the second information display unit. Configured to obtain
As an effect that can be displayed on the second information display unit, it has at least a continuation effect that suggests continuation of the advantageous section,
A revolving game machine characterized in that a lottery aspect relating to a notification state is different between a game capable of executing the continuation effect and a game preceding the game capable of executing the continuation effect. .

The rotary type gaming machine according to the aspect (6)
Multiple reels,
Multiple stop switches,
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display section capable of displaying the effect;
A sub-game unit that performs display control of the effect on the effect display unit,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to display, on the effect display unit, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means. Configured,
As a gaming state relating to replaying, at least a first replaying state and a second replaying state in which the winning probability of the regamer is relatively higher than the first replaying state,
The specific symbol combination related to the specific combination is stopped and displayed under the situation of the second replaying state, and is configured to shift to the first replaying state,
In the game state that is in the notification state and in the second replaying state, in the game that has won the specific role, an end suggestion display that suggests the possibility of the end of the second replaying state can be displayed. ,
In the game in which the end suggestion display is displayed, the display of the end suggestion display is erased when it is determined that the specific symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (7) is
Multiple reels,
An information display unit capable of displaying information with a plurality of stop switches,
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
In a situation where the information state is controlled, at least in a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination can be displayed on the information display unit. Configured,
Having an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued up to a predetermined number of games after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the one special symbol combination related to the first special combination having the same winning probability is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the first special gaming state.
When the selected set value is different, the one special symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities can be different is stopped and displayed, and the second special gaming state is entered.
As a gaming state related to re-playing, it has at least a plurality of re-playing states with relatively different winning probabilities of re-game players,
Based on the fact that the first special combination is won in the situation controlled to the notification state, the number of games that can be executed in the notification state can be increased,
Based on the fact that the second special role is won in the situation where the notification state is controlled, the number of games that can be executed in the notification state cannot be increased.
A revolving type characterized by being configured to increase the number of games that can be executed in the notification state in a predetermined re-playing state that is executed after the second special gaming state has ended. It is a gaming machine.

The spinning machine according to the aspect (8) is
Multiple reels,
An information display unit capable of displaying information with a plurality of stop switches,
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
In a situation where the information state is controlled, at least in a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, information capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination can be displayed on the information display unit. Configured,
Having an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued up to a predetermined number of games after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the one special symbol combination related to the first special combination having the same winning probability is stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the first special gaming state.
When the selected set value is different, the one special symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities can be different is stopped and displayed, and the second special gaming state is entered.
As a gaming state related to re-playing, it has at least a plurality of re-playing states with relatively different winning probabilities of re-game players,
It is configured to be able to execute a notification state increase suggestion effect that is an effect that suggests that the number of games that can be executed in the notification state increases or suggests that the number of games that can be executed in the notification state has increased. And
When the notification state increase suggestion effect based on the transition to the first special gaming state is executed, the game that can be executed in the notification state at a timing prior to the execution of the notification state increase suggestion effect. The number is determined to increase,
When the notification state increase suggestion effect based on the transition to the second special gaming state is executed, the game that can be executed in the notification state at a timing later than the execution of the notification state increase suggestion effect. A swivel-type gaming machine configured to be determined to increase in number.

The spinning machine according to this aspect (9)
Multiple reels,
An effect display section that can display multiple stop switches and effects,
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to display, on the effect display unit, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means. Configured,
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the first special combination with the same winning probability is configured to stop and be displayed, so that the first special gaming state is entered.
When the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities may be different is configured to stop and display to shift to the second special gaming state. ,
The notification expectation suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting the expectation level that the notification state after the special game state ends, is configured to be executable,
As an effect mode of the notification expectation level suggestion effect, a first effect mode and a second effect mode with a relatively high expectation level to be in the notification state after the end of the special gaming state than the first effect mode, At least,
Executed based on the notification expectation suggestion effect executed based on the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the first special combination and the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the second special combination. In the above-mentioned notification expectation suggestion effect, the spinning machine is configured such that the probability that the second effect mode is executed is different.

The spinning machine according to this aspect (10)
Multiple reels,
An information display unit capable of displaying information,
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the first special combination with the same winning probability is configured to stop and be displayed, so that the first special gaming state is entered.
When the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities may be different is configured to stop and display to shift to the second special gaming state. ,
It is configured to be able to execute a setting value suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting the selected set value,
In the spinning type gaming machine, the setting value suggesting effect is more easily executed in the second special gaming state than in the first special gaming state. is there.

The spinning machine according to this aspect (11)
Role lottery means for performing role lottery,
As an information display part capable of displaying information, a first information display part and a second information display part are provided,
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
The first information display unit is configured to display either the advantageous section or the non-favorable section.
It can be newly controlled to the notification state triggered by the winning of a specific role,
In a situation where the notification state is controlled, at least a game in which a predetermined combination is won by the combination lottery means, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination is displayed on the second information display unit. Configured to obtain
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
The winning lottery means is a first winning that is a winning of a predetermined role that has the same winning probability even when the selected set values are different, and is a winning that does not overlap with a special role that can execute a special game; Determining at least a second winning that is a duplicate winning of the special role and the predetermined role;
As an effect that can be displayed on the second information display unit over one or more games, a special game effect that informs whether or not a special game is executed, and a notification state effect that suggests the presence or absence of a transition to a new notification state, At least,
If the first win is decided in the situation of the unfavorable section,
The display on the first information display unit can be changed from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section in the correspondingly selected game, and the display of the notification state effect can be started in the game after the selected game. Is composed of
When the second winning is determined in the situation of the non-advantageous section,
The display on the first information display unit can be changed from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section in the correspondingly selected game, and the display of the notification state effect can be started in the game after the selected game. Or, in the game in which the special game has started to be executed, the display on the first information display unit is changed from the non-advantageous area to the advantageous area, and the special game is executed from the winning game. A revolving type gaming machine configured to be able to start displaying a special game-making effect in a game up to a started game.

The rotary type gaming machine according to this aspect (12)
A main game section that controls the progress of the game;
With a sub-game unit that controls the display of the production,
The main game department
With special production execution means to execute special production including freeze production,
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Having at least an advantageous section that is a game section that can be continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit after satisfying a predetermined start condition, and a non-advantage section that is a game section other than the advantageous section;
When the gaming section is the non-advantageous section, it is configured such that the probability that a predetermined special effect is executed according to the selected set value can be different. It is.

P Cylinder type game machine, DU front door (door)
D Door board, D10s Input acceptance sensor D20s First input sensor, D30s Second input sensor D40 Stop button, D41 Left stop button D42 Middle stop button, D43 Right stop button D50 Start lever, D60 Checkout button D70 Display panel, D80 Door switch D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decoration lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Operation status indicator D200 Credit number indicator, D210 Insertion number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game status display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub control board S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Revolving backlight S40 Production display device, SC Sub control chip E Power supply board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device, H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor, H40 Hopper H50 Disc, H50a Disc rotation axis H60 Game medal exit, H70 Discharge urging means H80 Hopper motor K Cylinder board, K10 Cylinder motor K20 Cylinder sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub input button KHc High security failure counter, YKc-1 Number counter FZt freeze execution timer

Claims (1)

Multiple reels,
An effect display section that can display multiple stop switches and effects,
A role lottery means for performing a role lottery,
By satisfying the predetermined condition, it can be controlled to the notification state,
Under the situation where the notification state is controlled, it is possible to display, on the effect display unit, information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is won by at least the combination lottery means. Configured,
One set value can be selected from multiple set values.
Even if the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the first special combination with the same winning probability is configured to stop and be displayed, so that the first special gaming state is entered.
When the selected set values are different, the symbol combination related to the second special combination configured so that the winning probabilities may be different is configured to stop and display to shift to the second special gaming state. ,
The notification expectation suggestion effect, which is an effect suggesting the expectation level that the notification state after the special game state ends, is configured to be executable,
As an effect mode of the notification expectation level suggestion effect, a first effect mode and a second effect mode with a relatively high expectation level to be in the notification state after the end of the special gaming state than the first effect mode, At least,
Executed based on the notification expectation suggestion effect executed based on the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the first special combination and the stop display of the one symbol combination related to the second special combination. The above described notification expectation suggestion effect is configured such that the probability that the second effect mode is executed is different.

Images